building 73 phase 2a remodel 100% construction...

University of Utah BUILDING 73 Phase 2a Remodel

100% Construction Documents

Construction Documents

May 18, 2020 U of U Project # 22363

GSBS Project # 2018.064.010

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1

U OF U BLDG 73 REMODEL - PHASE 2a

CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

GSBS PROJECT. NO. 2018.064.01 | U OF U PROJECT. NO. 22363

Table of Contents

05/18/2020

Division Section Title

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL CONDITIONS

011000 SUMMARY

012300 ALTERNATES

012400 PROCUREMENT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

012600 COTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES

013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

013516 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES

014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

014200 REFERENCES

015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

017300 EXECUTION

017419 CONSTRUCITON WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

017900 DEMOSTRATION AND TRAINING

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

033300 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE

DIVISION 05 – METALS

054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

DIVISION 06 – WOODS, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

079200 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS

084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

087100 DOOR HARDWARE

088000 GLAZING

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 2




092900 GYPSUM BOARD

095123 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

09651 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

096813 TILE CARPETING

099123 INTERIOR PAINTING

DIVISION 23 – HVAC

230500 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

230529 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

230700 MECHANICAL INSULATION

233713 AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS

235700 HEAT TRANSFER

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

260500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

310513 COMMON FILL

311100 SITE CLEARING

312316 EXCAVATION

312323 BACKFILLING STRUCTURES

312326 COMPACTION

312500 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

321313 CONCRETE PAVING

321373 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS

321726 TACTILE WARNING SURFACING

328400 PLANTING IRRIGATION

329113 SOIL PREPARATION

329200 TURF AND GRASSES

329300 PLANTS

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

330507 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE

330514 UTILITY GRADE ADJUSTMENT

330520 BACKFILLING TRENCHES

334100 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

SUMMARY 011000 - 1

U OF U BLDG 73 REMODEL - PHASE 2aCONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS


SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information.2. Work covered by Contract Documents.3. Phased construction.4. Work performed by Owner.5. Multiple Work Packages.6. Work under Owners separate contracts.7. Owner-furnished/Owner-installed (OFOI) products.8. Contractor's use of site and premises.9. Coordination with occupants of Building 72.10. Work restrictions.11. Specification and Drawing conventions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

2. Section 017300 "Execution" for coordination of Owner-installed products.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Work Package: A group of specifications, drawings, and schedules prepared by the design team to describe a portion of the Project Work for pricing, permitting, and construction.

1.4 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: 1. University of Utah Building 73 Phase 2 Remodel #22363

2. Project Location: University of Utah, Building 73, 332 S 1400 E, Salt Lake City, UT 84112

SUMMARY 011000 - 2



B. Owner: University of Utah

1. Owner's Representative: Mark Grabl, [email protected], 801-581-6093

C. Architect: GSBS Architects, 375 West 200 South, Salt Lake City, UT 84101

1. Architect's Representative: Jesse Allen, [email protected], 801-521-8600

D. Architect's Consultants: Architect has retained the following design professionals, who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:

1. Mechanical: Colvin Engineering Associatesa. Mechanical Representative: Rob Van, [email protected], 801-505-5387

2. Electrical: EELD a. Electrical Representative: Mansour Abhdasi, [email protected], 801-486-2222

3. Civil: Ensign Engineeringa. Civil Representative: Brandon Page, [email protected], 801-255-0529

4. Landscape Architecture: GSBSa. Landscape Architecture Representative: Julian Rosario,

[email protected], 801-521-86005. Cost Estimator: Construction Control Corporation

a. Cost Representative: Kris Larson, [email protected], 801-578-1201

E. Construction Manager/General Contractor: Gramoll Construction has been engaged as Construction Manager/General Contractor for this Project.

1. Construction Manager/General Contractor Representative: Dustin Gramoll, [email protected], 801-295-2341

2. Construction Manager for this Project is Project's constructor. The terms "Construction Manager" and "Contractor" are synonymous.

F. Project Information Exchange Web Site: A project Information Exchange Web Site administered by Architect will be used for purposes of managing communication and documents during the construction stage.

1. See Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." for requirements for using the Information Exchange Web Site.

1.5 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and includes, but is not limited to, the following:

1. Remodel of the lobby and corridors of the existing Building 73 on the University of Utah Campus for the Theatre and Development Departments. Exterior envelope improvements including new glazing system. Site Improvements including a new amphitheater classroom and accessible routes to the east and west side of the building.

mailto:[email protected]








SUMMARY 011000 - 3



B. Type of Contract:

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.6 WORK PERFORMED BY OWNER

A. Cooperate fully with Owner, so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying Work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner.

B. Preceding Work: Owner will perform the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before Work under this Contract begins.

1. Abatement of hazardous materials

C. Subsequent Work: Owner will perform the following additional work at site after Substantial Completion. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of preparatory Work under this Contract.

1. Installation of Equipment and Furnishings

1.7 MULTIPLE WORK PACKAGES

A. Construction Documents for this Project will be issued in a series of Work Packages, each defining the Work under individual Contracts. Coordinate the Work under this Contract with separate contracts defined by other work packages. Work Packages consist of the following:

1. Bid Package #1 – Phase 2a a. Remodel of existing lobby and corridors of BLDG 73. Site Improvements

including new amphitheater classroom and accessible routes on the east and west side of the building.

b. To be issued 05/18/2020

2. Big Package #2 – Phase 2ba. Replacement of the exterior glazing system on BLDG 73.b. To be issued July, 2020

1.8 WORK UNDER OWNER'S SEPARATE CONTRACTS

A. Work with Separate Contractors: Cooperate fully with Owner's separate contractors, so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying Work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under Owner's separate contracts.

SUMMARY 011000 - 4



B. Preceding Work: Owner has awarded separate contract(s) for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before Work under this Contract begins.

1. Abatement of hazardous materials

1.9 OWNER-FURNISHED/OWNER-INSTALLED (OFOI) PRODUCTS

A. The Owner will furnish and install products indicated in drawings.

B. Owner-Furnished/Owner-Installed (OFOI) Products:

1. The contractor shall coordinate installation time in the construction schedule with the Owner so the Owner has sufficient time to order products.

1.10 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE AND PREMISES

A. Limits on Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to limits of construction on the drawings, Building 73, and areas indicated on U of U issued Project Parking Plan Worksheet. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

B. Condition of Existing Grounds: Maintain portions of existing grounds, landscaping, and hardscaping affected by construction operations throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.

1.11 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy Building 72 during entire construction period, with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.1. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's

operations.

B. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.

1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work.

2. Obtain a “Final Inspection” from authorities having jurisdiction before limited Owner occupancy.

3. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On

SUMMARY 011000 - 5



occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of Work.

4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of Work.

1.12 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets, work on public streets, rights of way, and other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving Building 72 occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging for temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than 7 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

C. Smoking and Controlled Substance Restrictions: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances is not permitted.

D. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times.

E. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug and background screening of Contractor personnel working on Project site.

1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative.

1.13 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

SUMMARY 011000 - 6



C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on Drawings and published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard.

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000

ALTERNATES 012300 - 1

U OF U BLDG 73 THEATRE AND DEVELOPMENT DEPARTMENT REMODELDESIGN DEVELOPMENT


SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement.

2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternates into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include, as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation, whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other Work of the Contract.

C. Schedule: A Part 3 "Schedule of Alternates" Article is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.

ALTERNATES 012300 - 2

U OF U BLDG 73 THEATRE AND DEVELOPMENT DEPARTMENT REMODELDESIGN DEVELOPMENT



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Phase 2a Alternate No. 1: West Accessible Route

1. Base Bid: Provide West Accessible Route as shown in the Construction Documents2. Alternate: Remove walkway and ramp improvements from the project.


PROCUREMENT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012400 - 1



DOCUMENT 012400 - PROCUREMENT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

1.1 DEFINITIONS

A. Procurement Substitution Requests: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those indicated in the Procurement and Contracting Documents, submitted prior to receipt of bids.

B. Substitution Requests: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those indicated in the Contract Documents, submitted following Contract award. See Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for conditions under which Substitution requests will be considered following Contract award.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.3 PROCUREMENT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Procurement Substitutions, General: By submitting a bid, the Bidder represents that its bid is based on materials and equipment described in the Procurement and Contracting Documents, including Addenda. Bidders are encouraged to request approval of qualifying substitute materials and equipment when the Specifications Sections list materials and equipment by product or manufacturer name.

B. Procurement Substitution Requests will be received and considered by Owner when the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by Architect; otherwise requests will be returned without action:

1. Extensive revisions to the Contract Documents are not required.2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of the Contract Documents,

including the level of quality of the Work represented by the requirements therein.3. The request is fully documented and properly submitted.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Procurement Substitution Request: Submit to Architect. Procurement Substitution Request must be made in writing by prime contract Bidder only in compliance with the following requirements:

1. Requests for substitution of materials and equipment will be considered if received no later than 7 days prior to date of bid opening.

PROCUREMENT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012400 - 2



2. Submittal Format: Submit one electronic copy of each written Procurement Substitution Request, using CSI Substitution Request Form 1.5C.

a. Identify the product or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related Specifications Sections and drawing numbers.

b. Provide complete documentation on both the product specified and the proposed substitute, including the following information as appropriate:

1) Point-by-point comparison of specified and proposed substitute product data, fabrication drawings, and installation procedures.

2) Copies of current, independent third-party test data of salient product or system characteristics.

3) Samples where applicable or when requested by Architect.4) Detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitute with

those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

5) Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.

6) Research reports, where applicable, evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-ES and any other applicable code organizations.

7) Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, which will become necessary to accommodate the proposed substitute.

c. Provide certification by manufacturer that the substitute proposed is equal to or superior to that required by the Procurement and Contracting Documents, and that its in-place performance will be equal to or superior to the product or equipment specified in the application indicated.

d. Bidder, in submitting the Procurement Substitution Request, waives the right to additional payment or an extension of Contract Time because of the failure of the substitute to perform as represented in the Procurement Substitution Request.

e. Bidder, in submitting the Procurement Substitution Request is responsible for any cost associated with changes to adjacent or supporting construction to accommodate the substituted item.

B. Architect's Action:

1. Architect may request additional information or documentation necessary for evaluation of the Procurement Substitution Request. Architect will notify all bidders of acceptance of the proposed substitute by means of an Addendum to the Procurement and Contracting Documents.

C. Architect's approval of a substitute during bidding does not relieve Contractor of the responsibility to submit required shop drawings and to comply with all other requirements of the Contract Documents.

END OF DOCUMENT 002600

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1



SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 012300 "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate.2. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable

product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A.2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,

as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable.




b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested.f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated.i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,

from ICC-ES.j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed

substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.





A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided.

c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction.f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will only consider requests for substitution if received during the bid period. Request made after the bid period will not be allowed.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:




a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.

c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

d. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided.

e. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.f. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.g. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction.h. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.i. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.j. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.k. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.



CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1



SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.


1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on Architect’s or Owner’s standard Supplemental Instructions form.

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.




d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

7. Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect.

1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on Architect’ standard Change Order form.

1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on Architect’s or Owner’s standard Construction Change Directive form. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1



SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for

handling changes to the Contract.2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements

governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.b. Submittal schedule.c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction

schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.




B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location.b. Name of Architect.c. Architect's project number.d. Contractor's name and address.e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703.3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the

following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division.b. Description of the Work.c. Name of subcontractor.d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.e. Name of supplier.f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-

hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

1) Labor.2) Materials.3) Equipment.

4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.

a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount.

5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance.

7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by




measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.

9. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

10. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by Architect.

C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment.

3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration.

E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.




1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials.

2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.

3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:

a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment.

b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.

c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.

F. Transmittal: Submit one signed and notarized electronic PDF copy of each Application for Payment to Architect via Architects Newforma Info Exchange website. Include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.

3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.

4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.

5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner.

H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors.2. Schedule of values.3. Sustainable design submittal for project materials cost data.4. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).5. Schedule of unit prices.6. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).7. List of Contractor's staff assignments.8. List of Contractor's principal consultants.9. Copies of building permits.




10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work.

11. Initial progress report.12. Report of preconstruction conference.

I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

J. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."7. Evidence that claims have been settled.8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of

date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.




PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1



SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures.2. Design team and owner team availability3. Coordination drawings.4. Requests for Information (RFIs).5. Newforma Information Exchange web site.6. Project meetings.


1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.




B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.

1.6 DESIGN TEAM & OWNER TEAM AVAILABILITY

A. Working Hours: Since the majority of the construction work will be performed after regular working hours, the design team and owner team will not be available to the contractor if a problem should arise during construction hours.

1. The contractor needs to plan ahead and have questions ready during regular working hours of 9:00 AM to 5:00 PM.

1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is




required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components.

b. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

c. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation.

d. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls.

e. Indicate required installation sequences.f. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that

appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.

2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components.

3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment.

4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of

embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items.

6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:

a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.

b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.

c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.




7. Electrical Work: Show the following:

a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger.b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-

alarm locations.c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor

control center locations.d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.

8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following:

a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads.

9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.

C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements:

1. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using Portable Data File (PDF) format.

2. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings.

b. Digital Data Software Program: Drawings are available in Revit 2015.c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement form

acceptable to Owner and Architect. Also see Section 013300 “Submittal Procedures” for requirements pertaining to the release of Architect’s digital data drawing files.

1.8 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.




B. Frivolous RFIs: The construction documents will be provided in a searchable PDF format. If the contractor submits more than (10) ten RFIs where the answer can be reasonable found by a search of the PDF documents, the contractor will cover the cost of the design team’s time to respond to frivolous RFI. This cost will be a minimum of $50 for each frivolous RFI.

1. If there is dispute regarding the validity of the RFI, the owner will make the final determination.

C. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:

1. Project name.2. Project number.3. Date.4. Name of Contractor.5. Name of Architect.6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.7. RFI subject.8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the

Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.12. Contractor's signature.13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

D. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

E. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals.b. Requests for approval of substitutions.c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents.e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.




g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following:

1. Project name.2. Name and address of Contractor.3. Name and address of Architect.4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.5. RFI description.6. Date the RFI was submitted.7. Date Architect's response was received.

G. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.

1.9 NEWFORMA INFORMATION EXCHANGE WEB SITE

A. Contractor shall use Architects Information Exchange wet site for purpose of project communication and documentation with Architect and Owner until Final Completion. Information Exchange site shall include the following functions:

1. Project directory.2. Contract modifications (ASI, PR, COR, CCD, CO).3. RFI4. Submittals5. Site Observation6. Payment application 7. Punch List8. Reminder and tracking functions.

B. Contractor shall not use the Architects Information Exchange web site for communication with or management of subcontractors.




1.10 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions

and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.

4. Meeting Time: The meeting time needs to be during regular working hours between 8:00 AM and 4:00 PM.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.

1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner Architect, and their consultants;

Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule.b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.c. Designation of key personnel and their duties.d. Lines of communications.e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.f. Procedures for RFIs.g. Procedures for testing and inspecting.h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.i. Distribution of the Contract Documents.j. Submittal procedures.k. Sustainable design requirements.l. Preparation of record documents.m. Use of the premises and existing building.n. Work restrictions.o. Working hours.p. Owner's occupancy requirements.q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.r. Procedures for moisture and mold control.s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.t. Construction waste management and recycling.u. Parking availability.v. Office, work, and storage areas.w. Equipment deliveries and priorities.




x. First aid.y. Security.z. Progress cleaning.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents.b. Options.c. Related RFIs.d. Related Change Orders.e. Purchases.f. Deliveries.g. Submittals.h. Sustainable design requirements.i. Review of mockups.j. Possible conflicts.k. Compatibility requirements.l. Time schedules.m. Weather limitations.n. Manufacturer's written instructions.o. Warranty requirements.p. Compatibility of materials.q. Acceptability of substrates.r. Temporary facilities and controls.s. Space and access limitations.t. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.u. Testing and inspecting requirements.v. Installation procedures.w. Coordination with other work.x. Required performance results.y. Protection of adjacent work.z. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.




5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 60 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion.

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following:

a. Preparation of record documents.b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final

inspection for acceptance.c. Submittal of written warranties.d. Requirements for completing sustainable design documentation.e. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.f. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts.g. Requirements for demonstration and training.h. Preparation of Contractor's punch list.i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and

for final payment.j. Submittal procedures.k. Coordination of separate contracts.l. Owner's partial occupancy requirements.m. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment.n. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.

1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,

subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.




a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements.2) Sequence of operations.3) Status of submittals.4) Status of sustainable design documentation.5) Deliveries.6) Off-site fabrication.7) Access.8) Site utilization.9) Temporary facilities and controls.10) Progress cleaning.11) Quality and work standards.12) Status of correction of deficient items.13) Field observations.14) Status of RFIs.15) Status of proposal requests.16) Pending changes.17) Status of Change Orders.18) Pending claims and disputes.19) Documentation of information for payment requests.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.




CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1



SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Contractor's construction schedule.2. Construction schedule updating reports.3. Daily construction reports.4. Special reports.


1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.2. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and

inspections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled.


A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:




1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated.2. PDF electronic file.

B. Startup construction schedule.

1. Approval of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of schedule of values for cost-loaded activities.

C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period.

D. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.

E. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at monthly intervals.

F. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of Substantial Completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect.

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.




a. Major mechanical, plumbing, electrical or fire protection equipment.

b. Any elements being supplied from out of the country.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.

4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing.5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for

Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion.

C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.

1. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.2. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by

Owner.3. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery

date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.

4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Coordination with existing construction.b. Limitations of continued occupancies.c. Uninterruptible services.d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.e. Use of premises restrictions.f. Provisions for future construction.g. Seasonal variations.h. Environmental control.

D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.

E. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and actual dates used for preparation of payment requests.

1. See Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures.

F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:

1. Unresolved issues.2. Unanswered Requests for Information.3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.




4. Notations on returned submittals.5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.

G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.

H. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's construction schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the Work. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information received since the start of Project.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.

1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.

2.3 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site.2. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.3. Equipment at Project site.4. Material deliveries.5. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or

snow.6. Accidents.7. Meetings and significant decisions.8. Unusual events (see special reports).9. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.10. Meter readings and similar recordings.11. Emergency procedures.12. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.13. Change Orders received and implemented.14. Construction Change Directives received and implemented.15. Services connected and disconnected.16. Equipment or system tests and startups.




17. Partial completions and occupancies.18. Substantial Completions authorized.

2.4 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.

B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the

same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.


SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1



SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.


1. Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values.

2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.

3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

4. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.

5. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."

C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files.




D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.


A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal.b. Specification Section number and title.c. Submittal category: Action; informational.d. Name of subcontractor.e. Description of the Work covered.f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.g. Scheduled date of fabrication.h. Scheduled dates for purchasing.i. Scheduled dates for installation.j. Activity or event number.

B. Look Ahead Submittal Schedule: Rolling 90 day schedule of upcoming submittals.

1. Provide at start of project.2. Update on the same time frame as progress meetings.3. Review in progress meetings.

1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

1. Architect will furnish Contractor a digital data drawing file of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings.




a. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Building Information Model that includes the views from which the Contract Documents were created is available in the current version of Autodesk Revit.

b. Use of, and reliance upon, the Building Information Model by the Contractor, its sub-contractors and suppliers of any tier is subject to the AIA E203 - Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, included in the Contract Documents, and the current G202, Project Building Information Modeling Protocol Form.

c. If the Contract Documents do not include an AIA E203 - Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, the Building information Model will not be available for the Contractor’s use.

2. In the event that the Building Information Model is not available, or the Contractor does not intend to use that format, the Architect may furnish Contractor digital data drawing files of limited portions of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings with the following conditions:

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.

b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings will be made available in the current version of Autodesk AutoCad.

c. Contractor will execute a GSBS Architects Conditional Release Agreement.

d. The following digital data files are available, for each appropriate discipline, at a cost to the Contractor of $250.00 per sheet:

1) Site plans2) Floor plans3) Reflected ceiling plans

B. Electronic Submittal Flow Chart: This flow chart will outline the electronic submittal process that will be followed for this project. An example is included at the end of this section.

1. A pre-construction conference shall be schedule to review the submittal procedures and refine the Flow Chart as necessary due to the particular demands of the project.

C. Software for electronic submittal review: Contractor shall provide ‘Bluebeam Revu Standard’ software licenses for design team members to facilitate the Electronic Submittal processing.

D. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.




2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

E. Quantity of Submittals: Contractor shall coordinate schedule so that there are no more than a total of 15 submittals or a total of 500 sheets for review at any single time in the schedule.

F. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 10 days for review of each resubmittal.4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants,

Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.

G. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:

1. Refer to Electronic Submittal Flow Chart at the end of this section.2. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal

requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

3. Name file as outlined in Electronic Submittals Flow Chart.

4. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.a. Use review stamp sheet provided by Architect at the end of this section.

5. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from electronic project management software acceptable to Architect, containing the following information:

a. Project name.b. Date.c. Name and address of Architect.d. Name of Contractor.




e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.g. Category and type of submittal.h. Submittal purpose and description.i. Specification Section number and title.j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each

of multiple items.k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.m. Related physical samples submitted directly.n. Indication of full or partial submittal.o. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.p. Other necessary identification.q. Remarks.

H. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

I. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.

J. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision.3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action

stamp.4. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor’s letterhead, record all new and/or

revised information from the original submittal.

K. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

L. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.




1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Newforma Info Exchange site specifically established for Project.

a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

2. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated.

b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer’s written recommendationsb. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.c. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.d. Manufacturer's product specifications.e. Standard color charts.f. Mill Reports.g. Compliance with recognized trade association standardsh. Compliance with recognized testing agency standardsi. Testing by recognized testing agency.j. Application of testing agency labels and seals.k. Notation of coordination requirements.l. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.b. Printed performance curves.c. Operational range diagrams.d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.6. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. Searchable PDF electronic file with bookmarks of all the sections.




C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Dimensions.b. Identification of products.c. Fabrication and installation drawingsd. Roughing-in and setting diagramse. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and

control wiring.f. Shopwork manufacturing instructionsg. Templates and patternsh. Schedules.i. Design calculationsj. Compliance with specified standards.k. Notation of coordination requirements.l. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.m. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 24by 36 inches.

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:

a. Searchable PDF electronic file with bookmarks of all the sections.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample.b. Product name and name of manufacturer.c. Sample source.d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.




a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record sample.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation."

G. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."

H. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

I. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."




J. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

K. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

L. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

M. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

N. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

O. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

P. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

R. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

S. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization.2. Date of evaluation.3. Time period when report is in effect.4. Product and manufacturers' names.5. Description of product.6. Test procedures and results.7. Limitations of use.

T. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.




Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.




B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.


ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 013516 - 1



SECTION 013516 - ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes special procedures for alteration work.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alteration Work: This term includes remodeling, renovation, repair, and maintenance work performed within existing spaces or on existing surfaces as part of the Project.

B. Consolidate: To strengthen loose or deteriorated materials in place.

C. Design Reference Sample: A sample that represents the Architect's prebid selection of work to be matched; it may be existing work or work specially produced for the Project.

D. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

E. Match: To blend with adjacent construction and manifest no apparent difference in material type, species, cut, form, detail, color, grain, texture, or finish; as approved by Architect.

F. Refinish: To remove existing finishes to base material and apply new finish to match original, or as otherwise indicated.

G. Repair: To correct damage and defects, retaining existing materials, features, and finishes. This includes patching, piecing-in, splicing, consolidating, or otherwise reinforcing or upgrading materials.

H. Replace: To remove, duplicate, and reinstall entire item with new material. The original item is the pattern for creating duplicates unless otherwise indicated.

I. Replicate: To reproduce in exact detail, materials, and finish unless otherwise indicated.

J. Reproduce: To fabricate a new item, accurate in detail to the original, and from either the same or a similar material as the original, unless otherwise indicated.




K. Retain: To keep existing items that are not to be removed or dismantled.

L. Strip: To remove existing finish down to base material unless otherwise indicated.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Pedestrian and Vehicular Circulation: Coordinate alteration work with circulation patterns within Project building(s) and site. Some work is near circulation patterns and adjacent to restricted areas. Circulation patterns cannot be closed off entirely and in places can be only temporarily redirected around small areas of work. Access to restricted areas may not be obstructed. Plan and execute the Work accordingly.

1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS FOR ALTERATION WORK

A. Preliminary Conference for Alteration Work: Before starting alteration work, conduct conference at Project site.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Architect, and Contractor, testing service representative, specialists, and chemical-cleaner manufacturer(s) shall be represented at the meeting.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress of alteration work, including review of the following:

a. Fire-prevention plan.b. Governing regulations.c. Areas where existing construction is to remain and the required protection.d. Hauling routes.e. Sequence of alteration work operations.f. Storage, protection, and accounting for salvaged and specially fabricated items.g. Existing conditions, staging, and structural loading limitations of areas where

materials are stored.h. Qualifications of personnel assigned to alteration work and assigned duties.i. Requirements for extent and quality of work, tolerances, and required clearances.j. Embedded work such as flashings and lintels, special details, collection of waste,

protection of occupants and the public, and condition of other construction that affects the Work or will affect the work.

3. Reporting: Record conference results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from conference.

B. Coordination Meetings: Conduct coordination meetings specifically for alteration work at weekly intervals. Coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Architect, and Contractor, each specialist, supplier, installer, and other entity concerned with progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of alteration work activities shall be represented




at these meetings. All participants at conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to alteration work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress of alteration work. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including review items listed in the "Preliminary Conference for Alteration Work" Paragraph in this article and the following:

1) Interface requirements of alteration work with other Project Work.2) Status of submittals for alteration work.3) Access to alteration work locations.4) Effectiveness of fire-prevention plan.5) Quality and work standards of alteration work.6) Change Orders for alteration work.

3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.


A. Preconstruction Documentation: Show preexisting conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that are to remain, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by Contractor's alteration work operations.

1.7 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF SALVAGED MATERIALS

A. Salvaged Materials:

1. Clean loose dirt and debris from salvaged items unless more extensive cleaning is indicated.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning; cushion against damage during handling. Label contents of containers.

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

B. Salvaged Materials for Reinstallation:

1. Repair and clean items for reuse as indicated.2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing; cushion against damage during handling.

Label contents of containers.3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.




4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment unless otherwise indicated. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials to make items functional for use indicated.

C. Existing Materials to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling from construction work. Where permitted by Architect, items may be dismantled and taken to a suitable, protected storage location during construction work and reinstalled in their original locations after alteration and other construction work in the vicinity is complete.

D. Storage: Catalog and store items within a weathertight enclosure where they are protected from moisture, weather, condensation, and freezing temperatures.

1. Identify each item for reinstallation with a nonpermanent mark to document its original location. Indicate original locations on plans, elevations, sections, or photographs by annotating the identifying marks.

2. Secure stored materials to protect from theft.3. Control humidity so that it does not exceed 85 percent. Maintain temperatures 5 deg F or

more above the dew point.

E. Storage Space:

1. Owner will arrange for limited on-site location(s) for free storage of salvaged material. This storage space does not include security and climate control for stored material.

2. Arrange for off-site locations for storage and protection of salvaged material that cannot be stored and protected on-site.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions that affect the Work by use of preconstruction photographs, video recordings or 3D scan.

B. Discrepancies: Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with removal and dismantling work.

C. Size Limitations in Existing Spaces: Materials, products, and equipment used for performing the Work and for transporting debris, materials, and products shall be of sizes that clear surfaces within existing spaces, areas, rooms, and openings, including temporary protection, by 12 inches or more.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION

A. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building, building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from harm resulting from alteration work.

1. Use only proven protection methods, appropriate to each area and surface being protected.

2. Provide temporary barricades, barriers, and directional signage to exclude the public from areas where alteration work is being performed.

3. Erect temporary barriers to form and maintain fire-egress routes.4. Erect temporary protective covers over walkways and at points of pedestrian and

vehicular entrance and exit that must remain in service during alteration work.5. Contain dust and debris generated by alteration work, and prevent it from reaching the

public or adjacent surfaces.6. Provide shoring, bracing, and supports as necessary. Do not overload structural elements.7. Protect floors and other surfaces along hauling routes from damage, wear, and staining.8. Provide supplemental sound-control treatment to isolate demolition work from other

areas of the building.

B. Temporary Protection of Materials to Remain:

1. Protect existing materials with temporary protections and construction. Do not remove existing materials unless otherwise indicated.

2. Do not attach temporary protection to existing surfaces except as indicated as part of the alteration work program.

C. Comply with each product manufacturer's written instructions for protections and precautions. Protect against adverse effects of products and procedures on people and adjacent materials, components, and vegetation.

D. Utility and Communications Services:

1. Notify Owner, Architect, authorities having jurisdiction, and entities owning or controlling wires, conduits, pipes, and other services affected by alteration work before commencing operations.

2. Disconnect and cap pipes and services as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as required for alteration work.

3. Maintain existing services unless otherwise indicated; keep in service, and protect against damage during operations. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities.




E. Existing Drains: Prior to the start of work in an area, test drainage system to ensure that it is functioning properly. Notify Architect immediately of inadequate drainage or blockage. Do not begin work in an area until the drainage system is functioning properly.

1. Prevent solids such as adhesive or mortar residue or other debris from entering the drainage system. Clean out drains and drain lines that become sluggish or blocked by sand or other materials resulting from alteration work.

2. Protect drains from pollutants. Block drains or filter out sediments, allowing only clean water to pass.

F. Existing Roofing: Prior to the start of work in an area, install roofing protection.

3.2 PROTECTION FROM FIRE

A. General: Follow fire-prevention plan and the following:

1. Comply with NFPA 241 requirements unless otherwise indicated.2. Remove and keep area free of combustibles, including rubbish, paper, waste, and

chemicals, unless necessary for the immediate work.

a. If combustible material cannot be removed, provide fire blankets to cover such materials.

B. Heat-Generating Equipment and Combustible Materials: Comply with the following procedures while performing work with heat-generating equipment or combustible materials, including welding, torch-cutting, soldering, brazing, removing paint with heat, or other operations where open flames or implements using high heat or combustible solvents and chemicals are anticipated:

1. Obtain Owner's approval for operations involving use of open-flame or welding or other high-heat equipment. Notify Owner at least 72 hours before each occurrence, indicating location of such work.

2. As far as practicable, restrict heat-generating equipment to shop areas or outside the building.

3. Do not perform work with heat-generating equipment in or near rooms or in areas where flammable liquids or explosive vapors are present or thought to be present. Use a combustible gas indicator test to ensure that the area is safe.

4. Use fireproof baffles to prevent flames, sparks, hot gases, or other high-temperature material from reaching surrounding combustible material.

5. Prevent the spread of sparks and particles of hot metal through open windows, doors, holes, and cracks in floors, walls, ceilings, roofs, and other openings.

6. Fire Watch: Before working with heat-generating equipment or combustible materials, station personnel to serve as a fire watch at each location where such work is performed. Fire-watch personnel shall have the authority to enforce fire safety. Station fire watch according to NFPA 51B, NFPA 241, and as follows:

a. Train each fire watch in the proper operation of fire-control equipment and alarms.




b. Prohibit fire-watch personnel from other work that would be a distraction from fire-watch duties.

c. Cease work with heat-generating equipment whenever fire-watch personnel are not present.

d. Have fire-watch personnel perform final fire-safety inspection each day beginning no sooner than 30 minutes after conclusion of work in each area to detect hidden or smoldering fires and to ensure that proper fire prevention is maintained.

C. Fire-Control Devices: Provide and maintain fire extinguishers, fire blankets, and rag buckets for disposal of rags with combustible liquids. Maintain each as suitable for the type of fire risk in each work area. Ensure that nearby personnel and the fire-watch personnel are trained in fire-extinguisher and blanket use.

D. Sprinklers: Where sprinkler protection exists and is functional, maintain it without interruption while operations are being performed. If operations are performed close to sprinklers, shield them temporarily with guards.

1. Remove temporary guards at the end of work shifts, whenever operations are paused, and when nearby work is complete.

3.3 PROTECTION DURING APPLICATION OF CHEMICALS

A. Protect motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building, building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from harm or spillage resulting from applications of chemicals and adhesives.

B. Cover adjacent surfaces with protective materials that are proven to resist chemicals selected for Project unless chemicals being used will not damage adjacent surfaces as indicated in alteration work program. Use covering materials and masking agents that are waterproof and UV resistant and that will not stain or leave residue on surfaces to which they are applied. Apply protective materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agents or adhesives to painted or porous surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly remove protective materials.

C. Do not apply chemicals during winds of sufficient force to spread them to unprotected surfaces.

D. Neutralize alkaline and acid wastes and legally dispose of off Owner's property.

E. Collect and dispose of runoff from chemical operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil contamination, soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, or water penetration into building interior.

3.4 GENERAL ALTERATION WORK

A. Have specialty work performed only by qualified specialists.

B. Ensure that supervisory personnel are present when work begins and during its progress.




C. Record existing work before each procedure (preconstruction), and record progress during the work. Use digital preconstruction documentation photographs, video recordings or 3D scan. Comply with requirements in Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation."

D. Perform surveys of Project site as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from alterations.

E. Notify Architect of visible changes in the integrity of material or components whether from environmental causes including biological attack, UV degradation, freezing, or thawing or from structural defects including cracks, movement, or distortion.

1. Do not proceed with the work in question until directed by Architect.


QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1



SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.




D. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

E. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

F. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

G. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

H. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.


A. Qualification Data : For Contractor's quality-control personnel.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

C. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title.




2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.3. Description of test and inspection.4. Identification of applicable standards.5. Identification of test and inspection methods.6. Number of tests and inspections required.7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.8. Requirements for obtaining samples.9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

1.6 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue.2. Project title and number.3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.7. Identification of product and Specification Section.8. Complete test or inspection data.9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting.11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements.12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements.6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:




1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements.4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.




1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program.

H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

1.8 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.




C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work.2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.5. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency.6. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site.

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.




1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

1.9 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted.2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as




possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.


REFERENCES 014200 - 1



SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if




bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States."

B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org.

2. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.3. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org.

C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Information is subject to change and is up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil.2. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov.3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology;

www.nist.gov.4. DOD - Department of Defense; www.quicksearch.dla.mil.5. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov.6. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov.7. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov.8. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov.9. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.10. HUD - Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov.11. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies

Division; www.eetd.lbl.gov.12. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov.13. SD - Department of State; www.state.gov.

http://www.iapmo.org/

http://www.iccsafe.org/

http://www.icc-es.org/

http://www.usace.army.mil/

http://www.cpsc.gov/

http://www.nist.gov/

http://www.quicksearch.dla.mil/

http://www.energy.gov/

http://www.epa.gov/

http://www.faa.gov/

http://www.gpo.gov/

http://www.gsa.gov/

http://www.hud.gov/

http://www.eetd.lbl.gov/

http://www.osha.gov/

http://www.state.gov/




14. TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research Program; The National Academies; www.trb.org.

15. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov.

16. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov.17. USDJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice;

www.ojp.usdoj.gov.18. USP - U.S. Pharmacopeial Convention; www.usp.org.19. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com.

D. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office; www.gpo.gov/fdsys.

2. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from DLA Document Services; www.quicksearch.dla.mil.

3. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS).4. FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS).5. FS - Federal Specification; Available from DLA Document Services;

www.quicksearch.dla.mil.

a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil.b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design

Guide; www.wbdg.org/ccb.

6. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD).7. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov.8. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See

USAB).




http://www.trb.org/

http://www.ars.usda.gov/

http://www.usda.gov/

http://www.ojp.usdoj.gov/

http://www.usp.org/

http://www.usps.com/

http://www.gpo.gov/fdsys



http://www.dsp.dla.mil/

http://www.gsa.gov/

http://www.wbdg.org/ccb

http://www.access-board.gov/

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1



SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations.

C. Water Service: Pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations.

D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations.

E. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use, coordinate with owner for metering and payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

F. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use, coordinate with owner for metering and payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.





A. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following:

1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work.2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing.3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge.4. Waste handling procedures.5. Other dust-control measures.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch-thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch-OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch-OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized-steel bases for supporting posts.

B. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.

C. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches.




D. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:

1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases.

2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot-square tack and marker boards.

3. Drinking water and private toilet.4. Coffee machine and supplies.5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68

to 72 deg F.6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height.

C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.

1. Store combustible materials apart from building.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures".




C. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.

1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system or private system indicated as directed by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction.

D. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

F. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.




G. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas.

1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed according to coordination drawings.

a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas.

b. Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped air-filtration units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete.

2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust-producing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dust-containment devices.

3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filter-equipped vacuum equipment.

H. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

1. Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes.

I. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner.

J. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

2. Install lighting for Project identification sign.

K. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access Project electronic documents and maintain electronic communications.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.




2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits indicated on Drawings.

1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust.

C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

D. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.

E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

F. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs.2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and

individuals seeking entrance to Project.

a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.

G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution."

I. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.




J. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, provided elevators are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide shoes, and similar items of limited life.

1. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity.2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect

elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.

K. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate.

L. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use.

1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000 "Summary."

C. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

D. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.

1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations.

2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner.




E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

F. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

G. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

H. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures.

I. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner and tenants from fumes and noise.

1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fire-retardant-treated plywood on construction operations side.

2. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet on each side. Cover floor with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire-retardant-treated plywood.

a. Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with not less than 48 inches between doors. Maintain water-dampened foot mats in vestibule.

3. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies.

4. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas.5. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security

locks where openings are required.6. Protect air-handling equipment.7. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.

J. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar

sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel

at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.




4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.

B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Protect porous materials from water damage.2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.4. Remove standing water from decks.5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.

C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building.

2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter.4. Discard or replace water-damaged material.5. Do not install material that is wet.6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before

enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.

D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions.2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity.3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and

exposure to water limits.

a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective.

b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposure and continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.




c. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours.

3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight.

D. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."


PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1



SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.


1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.2. Section 014200 "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.





A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article.

2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 10 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable

product request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.

2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.




3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment.5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.

3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.

6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

3. Products:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

4. Manufacturers:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.




Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.5. Samples, if requested.



EXECUTION 017300 - 1



SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout.2. Field engineering and surveying.3. Installation of the Work.4. Cutting and patching.5. Coordination of Owner-installed products.6. Progress cleaning.7. Starting and adjusting.8. Protection of installed construction.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.2. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions

of the building.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work.


A. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by professional engineer certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.





A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and procedures, use products for patching that comply with sustainable design requirements.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

1. Description of the Work.2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.4. Recommended corrections.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to




other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. General: Engage a professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish limits on use of Project site.3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain

required dimensions.4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable

tolerances.7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established

by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

D. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.




3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.

3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement.3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in

unoccupied spaces.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.




F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions

for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section 011000 "Summary."




F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.

G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a

diamond-core drill.4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where

required by cutting and patching operations.5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.




4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.7 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel.

1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.

2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.

3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly.




2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.




B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.


CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 1



SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial

demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements.2. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.

F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work.




1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 75 percent by weight of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials, including the following:

1. Demolition Waste:a. Concrete.b. Concrete reinforcing steel.c. Brick.d. Concrete masonry units.e. Wood studs.f. Wood joists.g. Plywood and oriented strand board.h. Wood paneling.i. Wood trim.j. Structural and miscellaneous steel.k. Rough hardware.l. Roofing.m. Insulation.n. Doors and frames.o. Door hardware.p. Windows.q. Glazing.r. Metal studs.s. Gypsum board.t. Acoustical tile and panels.u. Carpet.v. Carpet pad.w. Demountable partitions.x. Equipment.y. Cabinets.z. Plumbing fixtures.aa. Piping.bb. Supports and hangers.cc. Valves.dd. Sprinklers.ee. Mechanical equipment.ff. Refrigerants.gg. Electrical conduit.hh. Copper wiring.ii. Lighting fixtures.jj. Lamps.kk. Ballasts.ll. Electrical devices.mm. Switchgear and panelboards.nn. Transformers.




2. Construction Waste:

a. Masonry and CMU.b. Lumber.c. Wood sheet materials.d. Wood trim.e. Metals.f. Roofing.g. Insulation.h. Carpet and pad.i. Gypsum board.j. Piping.k. Electrical conduit.l. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General" Paragraph

above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials:

1) Paper.2) Cardboard.3) Boxes.4) Plastic sheet and film.5) Polystyrene packaging.6) Wood crates.7) Plastic pails.


A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 7 days of date established for commencement of the Work.


A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit report. Use Form CWM-7 for construction waste and Form CWM-8 for demolition waste. Include the following information:

1. Material category.2. Generation point of waste.3. Total quantity of waste in tons.4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons.5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons.6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons.7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste.

B. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work.




C. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

D. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

E. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

F. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

G. Qualification Data: For waste management coordinator and refrigerant recovery technician].

H. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.


A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: Experienced firm, with a record of successful waste management coordination of projects with similar requirements.

B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification program.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste management coordinator.

2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition.

3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays.

4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities.

5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.




1.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.

B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition site-clearing and construction waste generated by the Work. Use Form CWM-1 for construction waste and Form CWM-2 for demolition waste. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.

C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Use Form CWM-3 for construction waste and Form CWM-4 for demolition waste. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures.

1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work.

2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.

6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location where materials separation will be performed.

D. Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste management plan. Use Form CWM-5 for construction waste and Form CWM-6 for demolition waste. Include the following:

1. Total quantity of waste.2. Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and cost of

collection containers for each type of waste.3. Total cost of disposal (with no waste management).4. Revenue from salvaged materials.5. Revenue from recycled materials.6. Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials.7. Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided.8. Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for each type of

waste.9. Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.

1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work.

1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return.

2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.

2. Comply with Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.

3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: Salvage items for reuse and handle as follows:

1. Clean salvaged items.2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating

elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed.3. Store items in a secure area until installation.4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and

equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make items functional for use indicated.

B. Salvaged Items for Sale: Not permitted on Project site.

C. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: Salvage items for Owner's use and handle as follows:




1. Clean salvaged items.2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating

elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed.3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

D. Doors and Hardware: Brace open end of door frames. Except for removing door closers, leave door hardware attached to doors.

E. Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fixtures. Seal openings with caps or plugs. Protect equipment from exposure to weather.

F. Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size.

G. Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage.

H. Electrical Devices: Separate switches, receptacles, switchgear, transformers, meters, panelboards, circuit breakers, and other devices by type.

3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.

B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall be shared equally by Owner and Contractor.

C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.

D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan.

1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin.

a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found.

2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.




5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor.

3.4 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals.

1. Pulverize concrete to maximum 1-1/2-inch size.

B. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other metals.

1. Pulverize masonry to maximum 1-1/2-inch size.

2. Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets.

C. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials.

D. Metals: Separate metals by type.

1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length.2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.

E. Asphalt Shingle Roofing: Separate organic and glass-fiber asphalt shingles and felts. Remove and dispose of nails, staples, and accessories.

F. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners.

G. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location.

H. Metal Suspension System: Separate metal members including trim, and other metals from acoustical panels and tile and sort with other metals.

I. Carpet and Pad: Roll large pieces tightly after removing debris, trash, adhesive, and tack strips.

1. Store clean, dry carpet and pad in a closed container or trailer provided by Carpet Reclamation Agency or carpet recycler.

J. Carpet Tile: Remove debris, trash, and adhesive.

1. Stack tile on pallet and store clean, dry carpet in a closed container or trailer provided by Carpet Reclamation Agency or carpet recycler.

K. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size.




L. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size.

3.5 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A. Packaging:

1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.

2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from

Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

B. Wood Materials:

1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.

C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.7 ATTACHMENTS

A. Form CWM-1 for construction waste identification.

B. Form CWM-2 for demolition waste identification.

C. Form CWM-3 for construction waste reduction work plan.




D. Form CWM-4 for demolition waste reduction work plan.

E. Form CWM-5 cost/revenue analysis of construction waste reduction work plan.

F. Form CWM-6 cost/revenue analysis of demolition waste reduction work plan.

G. Form CWM-7 for construction waste

H. Form CWM-8 for demolition waste.


CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1



SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures.2. Final completion procedures.3. Warranties.4. Final cleaning.5. Repair of the Work.


1. Section 017300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site.2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.3. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record

Specifications, and record Product Data.4. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's

personnel.


A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.




C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.

1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain owner’s signature for receipt of submittals.

5. Submit test/adjust/balance records.6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's

personnel of changeover in security provisions.




3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."

6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency

responders.8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements.9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."

2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.




1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name.b. Date.c. Name of Architect.d. Name of Contractor.e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. Excel and PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.

1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.




4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.




h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean

according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent.l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.

Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.

p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report.

D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.




3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.


OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1



SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.2. Emergency manuals.3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.4. Product maintenance manuals.5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.


1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.


A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions.




B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.

a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

C. Final Manual Submittal: Submit manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents.2. List of systems.3. List of equipment.4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."




2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page.2. Table of contents.3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual.2. Name and address of Project.3. Name and address of Owner.4. Date of submittal.5. Name and contact information for Contractor.6. Name and contact information for Architect.7. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the

systems contained in the manuals.8. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

D. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency.2. Emergency instructions.3. Emergency procedures.




B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire.2. Flood.3. Gas leak.4. Water leak.5. Power failure.6. Water outage.7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping.2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.4 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility.3. Operating standards.4. Operating procedures.5. Operating logs.6. Wiring diagrams.7. Control diagrams.8. Piped system diagrams.9. Precautions against improper use.10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name.3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.4. Equipment function.




5. Operating characteristics.6. Limiting conditions.7. Performance curves.8. Engineering data and tests.9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures.2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.3. Routine and normal operating instructions.4. Regulation and control procedures.5. Instructions on stopping.6. Normal shutdown instructions.7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number.2. Manufacturer's name.3. Color, pattern, and texture.4. Material and chemical composition.5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures.2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.




3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly.3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions.2. Troubleshooting guide.3. Precautions against improper maintenance.4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.




1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.




E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 017839 "Project Record Documents."

F. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.


PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1



SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings.2. Record Specifications.3. Record Product Data.4. Miscellaneous record submittals.


1. Section 017300 "Execution" for final property survey.2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints.2. Submit PDF electronic file of scanned marked-up record prints with bookmarks.

B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.

D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic

documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.c. Depths of foundations below first floor.d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.g. Actual equipment locations.h. Duct size and routing.i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.j. Changes made by Change Order or Work Change Directive.k. Changes made following Architect's written orders.l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.




B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:

1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original Contract Drawings.

2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.3. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.

Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.4. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution.5. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for

use in recording information.

a. See Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for requirements related to use of Architect's digital data files.

b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate layers.

C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files

that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

4. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name.b. Date.c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."d. Name of Architect.e. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable.




B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file or scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Specifications.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file or scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data.

1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file or scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up miscellaneous record submittals.

1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean,




dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.


DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 1



SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.


A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module.

B. Qualification Data: For instructor.

C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.

D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test.


A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.




1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.c. Operating standards.d. Regulatory requirements.e. Equipment function.f. Operating characteristics.g. Limiting conditions.h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals.b. Operations manuals.c. Maintenance manuals.d. Project record documents.e. Identification systems.f. Warranties and bonds.g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:




a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.b. Instructions on stopping.c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures.b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.c. Routine and normal operating instructions.d. Regulation and control procedures.e. Control sequences.f. Safety procedures.g. Instructions on stopping.h. Normal shutdown instructions.i. Operating procedures for emergencies.j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments.b. Checking adjustments.c. Noise and vibration adjustments.d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions.b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures.b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.d. Procedures for routine cleaninge. Procedures for preventive maintenance.f. Procedures for routine maintenance.g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions.b. Repair instructions.




c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.

d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.

C. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals.

D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.

E. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.


SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1



SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and store.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

E. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.




B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.

1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.


A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.

B. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building.

C. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property for dust control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

D. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.4. Use of elevator and stairs.

E. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations. Comply with Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation." Submit before Work begins.

F. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Provided by Owner. Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.




G. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition.


A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.


A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.


A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:

a. Furnishing in Lobby, Offices, and Open Office area will shifted outside construction limits.

B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify

Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

D. Hazardous Materials: Present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.

1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials

except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.3. Owner will provide material safety data sheets for suspected hazardous materials that are

known to be present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished because of building operations or processes performed there.




E. Historic Areas: Demolition and hauling equipment and other materials shall be of sizes that clear surfaces within historic spaces, areas, rooms, and openings, including temporary protection, by 12 inches or more.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations when possible.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. Existing warranties include the following:

1. Roof

B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.




C. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.

1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.

D. Steel Tendons: Locate tensioned steel tendons and include recommendations for de-tensioning.

E. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building demolition operations.

F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings and preconstruction photographs or video.

1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation."2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide

photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations.

3. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.2. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies.3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.




a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place.

c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and

remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling

specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:




1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

4. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 1 hours after flame-cutting operations.5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site.7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid

free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

C. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items.2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.4. Transport items to Owner's storage area on-site.5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.




3.6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.

B. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts.

C. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts.

D. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove.

E. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. See Alternate #2 for new roofing requirements.

1. Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories.2. Remove existing roofing system down to substrate.

3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas.3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that

will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.

3.9 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE

A. Reference demolition drawings

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1




SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cast-in-place concrete, including concrete materials, mixture design, placement

procedures, and finishes.


1. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the

following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume;

materials subject to compliance with requirements.

B. Water/Cement Ratio (w/cm): The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to

attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent.

b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.

c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.

d. Concrete Subcontractor.

2. Review the following:





a. Special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality

control.

b. Construction joints, control joints, isolation joints, and joint-filler strips.

c. Semirigid joint fillers.

d. Vapor-retarder installation.

e. Anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances.

f. Cold and hot weather concreting procedures.

g. Concrete finishes and finishing.

h. Curing procedures.

i. Forms and form-removal limitations.

j. Shoring and reshoring procedures.

k. Concrete repair procedures.

l. Concrete protection.

m. Initial curing and field curing of field test cylinders (ASTM C31/C31M.)

n. Protection of field cured field test cylinders.


A. Product Data: For each of the following.

1. Portland cement.

2. Fly ash.

3. Slag cement.

4. Blended hydraulic cement.

5. Silica fume.

6. Performance-based hydraulic cement

7. Aggregates.

8. Admixtures:

a. Include limitations of use, including restrictions on cementitious materials,

supplementary cementitious materials, air entrainment, aggregates, temperature at

time of concrete placement, relative humidity at time of concrete placement, curing

conditions, and use of other admixtures.

9. Fiber reinforcement.

10. Vapor retarders.

11. Curing materials.

12. Joint fillers.

13. Repair materials.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture, include the following:

1. Mixture identification.

2. Minimum 28-day compressive strength.

3. Durability exposure class.

4. Maximum w/cm.

5. Calculated equilibrium unit weight, for lightweight concrete.





6. Slump limit.

7. Air content.

8. Nominal maximum aggregate size.

9. Steel-fiber reinforcement content.

10. Synthetic micro-fiber content.

11. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site if

permitted.

12. Include manufacturer's certification that permeability-reducing admixture is compatible

with mix design.

13. Include certification that dosage rate for permeability-reducing admixture matches

dosage rate used in performance compliance test.

14. Intended placement method.

15. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions,

weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the

structure.

a. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.

D. Samples: For vapor retarder.

E. Concrete Schedule: For each location of each Class of concrete indicated in "Concrete

Mixtures" Article, including the following:

1. Concrete Class designation.

2. Location within Project.

3. Exposure Class designation.

4. Formed Surface Finish designation and final finish.

5. Curing process.


A. Qualification Data: For the following:

1. Installer: Include copies of applicable ACI certificates.

2. Ready-mixed concrete manufacturer.

3. Testing agency: Include copies of applicable ACI certificates.

B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials.

2. Admixtures.

3. Fiber reinforcement.

4. Curing compounds.





5. Floor and slab treatments.

6. Bonding agents.

7. Adhesives.

8. Vapor retarders.

9. Semirigid joint filler.

10. Joint-filler strips.

11. Repair materials.

C. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:

1. Portland cement.

2. Fly ash.

3. Slag cement.

4. Blended hydraulic cement.

5. Silica fume.

6. Performance-based hydraulic cement.

7. Aggregates.

8. Admixtures:

a. Permeability-Reducing Admixture: Include independent test reports, indicating

compliance with specified requirements, including dosage rate used in test.

D. Research Reports:

1. For concrete admixtures in accordance with ICC's Acceptance Criteria AC198.

2. For sheet vapor retarder/termite barrier, showing compliance with ICC AC380.

E. Preconstruction Test Reports: For each mix design.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs Project personnel qualified as an

ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is a certified ACI

Flatwork Concrete Finisher/Technician or an ACI Concrete Flatwork Technician with

experience installing and finishing concrete, incorporating permeability-reducing admixtures.

1. Post-Installed Concrete Anchors Installers: ACI-certified Adhesive Anchor Installer.

B. Ready-Mixed Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing

ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C94/C94M requirements for

production facilities and equipment.





1. Manufacturer certified in accordance with NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed

Concrete Production Facilities."

C. Laboratory Testing Agency Qualifications: A testing agency qualified in accordance with

ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for testing indicated and employing an ACI-certified Concrete

Quality Control Technical Manager.

1. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing

Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency

laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician,

Grade II.

D. Field Quality Control Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, qualified in accordance with ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for

testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as an ACI Concrete Field Testing

Technician, Grade 1, in accordance with ACI CPP 610.1 or an equivalent certification

program.

E. Mockups: Cast concrete formed-surface panels to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish,

texture, tolerances, floor treatments, and standard of workmanship.

1. Formed Surfaces: Build panel approximately 100 sq. ft. in the location indicated or, if not

indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.8 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction

testing on each concrete mixture.

1. Include the following information in each test report:

a. Admixture dosage rates.

b. Slump.

c. Air content.

d. Seven-day compressive strength.

e. 28-day compressive strength.

f. Permeability.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with ASTM C94/C94M and ACI 301.






A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 306.1 and as follows.

1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by

frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

2. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three

successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature

range required by ACI 301.

3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.

4. Do not place concrete in contact with surfaces less than 35 deg F, other than reinforcing

steel.

5. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305.1, and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature at time of discharge to not exceed 95 deg F.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep

subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish replacement sheet vapor

retarder/termite barrier material and accessories for sheet vapor retarder/ termite barrier and

accessories that do not comply with requirements or that fail to resist penetration by termites

within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless modified by requirements in the Contract

Documents.

2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations:

1. Obtain all concrete mixtures from a single ready-mixed concrete manufacturer for entire

Project.





2. Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same

manufacturer's plant.

3. Obtain aggregate from single source.

4. Obtain each type of admixture from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I, gray.

2. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F.

3. Slag Cement: ASTM C989/C989M, Grade 100 or 120.

4. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C595/C595M, Type IL, portland-limestone cement.

5. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240 amorphous silica.

6. Performance-Based Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C1157/C1157M: Type GU, general use.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M, Class 1N coarse aggregate or better, graded.

Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Alkali-Silica Reaction: Comply with one of the following:

a. Expansion Result of Aggregate: Not more than 0.04 percent at one-year when

tested in accordance with ASTM C1293.

b. Expansion Results of Aggregate and Cementitious Materials in Combination: Not

more than 0.10 percent at an age of 16 days when tested in accordance with

ASTM C1567.

c. Alkali Content in Concrete: Not more than 4 lb./cu. yd. for moderately reactive

aggregate or 3 lb./cu. yd. for highly reactive aggregate, when tested in accordance

with ASTM C1293 and categorized in accordance with ASTM C1778, based on

alkali content being calculated in accordance with ACI 301.

2. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal.

3. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures that

do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete.

Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride in steel-reinforced

concrete.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A.

2. Non-Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, non-

set-accelerating, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of

forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement

in concrete.

3. Permeability-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type S, hydrophilic,

permeability-reducing crystalline admixture, capable of reducing water absorption of

concrete exposed to hydrostatic pressure (PRAH).





a. Permeability: No leakage when tested in accordance with U.S. Army Corps of

Engineers CRD C48 at a hydraulic pressure of 200 psi for 14 days.

2.3 FIBER REINFORCEMENT

A. Synthetic Monofilament Micro-Fiber: Monofilament polypropylene micro-fibers engineered

and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C1116/C1116M, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2

inches long.

B. Synthetic Fibrillated Micro-Fiber: Fibrillated polypropylene micro-fibers engineered and

designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C1116/C1116M, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2

inches long.

2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder, Class A: ASTM E1745, Class A, except with maximum water-vapor

permeance of; not less than 10 mils thick. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or

pressure-sensitive tape.

B. Sheet Vapor Retarder, Class C: ASTM E1745, Class C, except with maximum water-vapor

permeance of; not less than 10 mils thick. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or

pressure-sensitive joint tape.

C. Sheet Vapor Retarder/Termite Barrier: ASTM E1745, Class A, except with maximum water-

vapor permeance of 0.03 perms; complying with ICC AC380. Include manufacturer's

recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.

1. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 15 deg F; ASTM D146/D146M.

2. Puncture Resistance: 224 lbf minimum; ASTM E154/E154M.

3. Water Absorption: 0.1 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at 70

deg F; ASTM D570.

4. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 231 feet minimum; ASTM D5385.

D. Bituminous Vapor Retarder: ASTM E1993/E1993M, 110-mil- thick, semiflexible, seven-ply

sheet membrane, consisting of reinforced core and carrier sheet with fortified asphalt layers,

protective weather coating, and removable plastic release liner. Furnish manufacturer's

accessories, including bonding asphalt, pointing mastics, and self-adhering joint tape.

2.5 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application

to fresh concrete.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film burlap-polyethylene sheet.





1. Color:

a. Ambient Temperature Below 50 deg F: Black.

b. Ambient Temperature between 50 deg F and 85 deg F: Any color.

c. Ambient Temperature Above 85 deg F: White.

C. Water: Potable or complying with ASTM C1602/C1602M.

D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming, Dissipating Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1,

Class B.

2.6 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or

ASTM D1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids,] in accordance with

ASTM D2240.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C1059/C1059M, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene

butadiene.

D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing

and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade and

class to suit requirements, and as follows:

1. Types I and II, nonload bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to

hardened concrete.

E. Floor Slab Protective Covering: Eight-feet- wide cellulose fabric.

2.7 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be

applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor

elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C150/C150M portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic

cement, as defined in ASTM C219.

2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,

and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand, as recommended

by underlayment manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested in accordance with

ASTM C109/C109M.





B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be

applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match

adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C150/C150M portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic

cement, as defined in ASTM C219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and

application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended

by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested in accordance with

ASTM C109/C109M.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of

laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, in accordance with ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs,

based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than

portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash or Other Pozzolans: 25 percent by mass.

2. Slag Cement: 50 percent by mass.

3. Silica Fume: 10 percent by mass.

4. Total of Fly Ash or Other Pozzolans, Slag Cement, and Silica Fume: 50 percent by mass,

with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent by mass and silica fume not

exceeding 10 percent by mass.

5. Total of Fly Ash or Other Pozzolans and Silica Fume: 35 percent by mass with fly ash or

pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent by mass and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent by

mass.

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Class J: Normal-weight concrete used for exterior retaining walls.

1. Exposure Class: ACI 318 W0 W1 C1.

2. Minimum Compressive Strength: 5000 psi at 28 days.

3. Maximum w/cm: 0.45.

4. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.

5. Slump Flow Limit: 22 inches, plus or minus 1.5 inches.

6. Air Content:





a. Exposure Class F1: 4.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for

concrete containing 1-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

7. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30 percent by weight

of cement.

2.10 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete in accordance with

ASTM C94/C94M and ASTM C1116/C1116M, and furnish batch ticket information.

B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete in accordance

with ASTM C94/C94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.

1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not

more than five minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released.

2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd., increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each

additional 1 cu. yd..

3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project

identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount

of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions:

1. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of concrete forms, accessories, and

reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been

performed.

2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide reasonable auxiliary services to accommodate field testing and inspections, acceptable

to testing agency, including the following:

1. Daily access to the Work.

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.

3. Secure space for storage, initial curing, and field curing of test samples, including source

of water and continuous electrical power at Project site during site curing period for test

samples.





4. Security and protection for test samples and for testing and inspection equipment at

Project site.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining Work that

is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete.

1. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with

items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with

tolerances in Section 7.5 of ANSI/AISC 303.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDER

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder in accordance with

ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install vapor retarder with longest dimension parallel with direction of concrete pour.

2. Face laps away from exposed direction of concrete pour.

3. Lap vapor retarder over footings and grade beams not less than 6 inches, sealing vapor

retarder to concrete.

4. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

5. Terminate vapor retarder at the top of floor slabs, grade beams, and pile caps, sealing

entire perimeter to floor slabs, grade beams, foundation walls, or pile caps.

6. Seal penetrations in accordance with vapor retarder manufacturer's instructions.

7. Protect vapor retarder during placement of reinforcement and concrete.

a. Repair damaged areas by patching with vapor retarder material, overlapping

damages area by 6 inches on all sides, and sealing to vapor retarder.

3.5 JOINTS

A. Construct joints true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Coordinate with floor slab pattern and concrete placement sequence.

1. Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated on

Drawings or as approved by Architect.

2. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement.

a. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated.

b. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and

slabs.





3. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and

girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.

4. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated on Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated on

Drawings, locate vertical joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in

concealed locations where possible.

5. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened

or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Doweled Joints:

1. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated on Drawings.

2. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel bar length to prevent concrete bonding to one

side of joint.

D. Dowel Plates: Install dowel plates at joints where indicated on Drawings.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, embedded items,

and vapor retarder is complete and that required inspections are completed.

1. Immediately prior to concrete placement, inspect vapor retarder for damage and deficient

installation, and repair defective areas.

2. Provide continuous inspection of vapor retarder during concrete placement and make

necessary repairs to damaged areas as Work progresses.

B. Notify Architect and testing and inspection agencies 24 hours prior to commencement of

concrete placement.

C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless

approved by Architect in writing, but not to exceed the amount indicated on the concrete

delivery ticket.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to

mixture.

D. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to

limitations of ACI 301, but not to exceed the amount indicated on the concrete delivery ticket.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to

mixture.

E. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new

concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness.

1. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.

2. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.





3. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures

and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

4. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment in accordance with

ACI 301.

a. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms.

b. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly

penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer.

c. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose

plasticity.

d. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate

concrete, and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items

without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

F. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of

construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.

3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.

4. Level concrete, cut high areas, and fill low areas.

5. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.

6. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface.

7. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. As-Cast Surface Finishes:

1. ACI 301 Surface Finish SF-2.0: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing

material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams.

a. Patch voids larger than 3/4 inch wide or 1/2 inch deep.

b. Remove projections larger than 1/4 inch.

c. Patch tie holes.

d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117 Class B.

e. Locations: Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed

finish, or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to

concrete. Tie holes do not require patching.

B. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to as cast surface finishes where indicated on Drawings:

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish:

a. Perform no later than one day after form removal.





b. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive

until producing a uniform color and texture.

c. If sufficient cement paste cannot be drawn from the concrete by the rubbing

process, use a grout made from the same cementitious materials used in the in-

place concrete.

d. Maintain required patterns or variances as shown on Drawings or to match design

reference sample – adjacent walls.

C. Related Unformed Surfaces:

1. At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed

surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a color and texture matching adjacent formed

surfaces.

2. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed

surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.

D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and locations

indicated on Drawings.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with

fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.

2. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

3.8 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In:

1. Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after Work of other trades is in place

unless otherwise indicated.

2. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction.

3. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still

green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and

terminations slightly rounded.

3.9 CONCRETE CURING

A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

1. Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 306.1 for cold weather protection during curing.

2. Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305.1 for hot-weather protection during curing.

3. Maintain moisture loss no more than 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing

operations.





B. Curing Formed Surfaces: Comply with ACI 308.1 as follows:

1. Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other

similar surfaces.

2. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing

period, as follows:

a. Absorptive Cover: Pre-dampen absorptive material before application; apply

additional water to absorptive material to maintain concrete surface continuously

wet.

3.10 TOLERANCES

A. Conform to ACI 117.

3.11 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact

faces of joints clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed

joints.

D. Overfill joint, and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete:

1. Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect.

2. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2

parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,

spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and

stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than

1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete.





a. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch.

b. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface.

c. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent.

d. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried.

e. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with

bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and

standard portland cement, so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color.

a. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match

before proceeding with patching.

b. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that will affect concrete's durability and

structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces:

1. Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish, and verify surface tolerances

specified for each surface.

a. Correct low and high areas.

b. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped

template.

2. Repair finished surfaces containing surface defects, including spalls, popouts,

honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing, and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that

penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of

width, and other objectionable conditions.

3. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.

4. Correct localized low areas during, or immediately after, completing surface-finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar.

a. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.

a. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level

surface.

b. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

6. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with repair topping.

a. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match

adjacent floor elevations.





b. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level

surface.

7. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter,

by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete.

a. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts, and expose steel reinforcement

with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around.

b. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding

agent.

c. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except

without coarse aggregate.

d. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.

e. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

8. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar.

a. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete, and clean off dust, dirt,

and loose particles.

b. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent.

c. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried.

d. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete.

e. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and

patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's

approval.

3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform field tests and inspections

and prepare testing and inspection reports.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests

and inspections and to submit reports.

1. Testing agency shall be responsible for providing curing container for composite samples

on Site and verifying that field-cured composite samples are cured in accordance with

ASTM C31/C31M.

2. Testing agency shall immediately report to Architect, Contractor, and concrete

manufacturer any failure of Work to comply with Contract Documents.

3. Testing agency shall report results of tests and inspections, in writing, to Owner,

Architect, Contractor, and concrete manufacturer within 48 hours of inspections and tests.





a. Test reports shall include reporting requirements of ASTM C31/C31M,

ASTM C39/C39M, and ACI 301, including the following as applicable to each test

and inspection:

1) Project name.

2) Name of testing agency.

3) Names and certification numbers of field and laboratory technicians

performing inspections and testing.

4) Name of concrete manufacturer.

5) Date and time of inspection, sampling, and field testing.

6) Date and time of concrete placement.

7) Location in Work of concrete represented by samples.

8) Date and time sample was obtained.

9) Truck and batch ticket numbers.

10) Design compressive strength at 28 days.

11) Concrete mixture designation, proportions, and materials.

12) Field test results.

13) Information on storage and curing of samples before testing, including

curing method and maximum and minimum temperatures during initial

curing period.

14) Type of fracture and compressive break strengths at seven days and 28 days.

C. Batch Tickets: For each load delivered, submit three copies of batch delivery ticket to testing

agency, indicating quantity, mix identification, admixtures, design strength, aggregate size,

design air content, design slump at time of batching, and amount of water that can be added at

Project site.

D. Inspections:

1. Headed bolts and studs.

2. Verification of use of required design mixture.

3. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.

4. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

5. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and

slabs.

6. Batch Plant Inspections: On a random basis, as determined by Architect.

E. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained in accordance with

ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed in accordance with the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete

mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50

cu. yd. or fraction thereof.

a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for

each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly

selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.





2. Slump: ASTM C143/C143M:

a. One test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test

for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

b. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Slump Flow: ASTM C1611/C1611M:

a. One test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test

for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

b. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

4. Air Content: ASTM C231/C231M pressure method, for normal-weight concrete;

ASTM C173/C173M volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete.

a. One test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour

of each concrete mixture.

5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064/C1064M:

a. One test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and above,

and one test for each composite sample.

6. Unit Weight: ASTM C567/C567M fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete.

a. One test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour

of each concrete mixture.

7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31/C31M:

a. Cast, initial cure, and field cure two sets of three standard cylinder specimens for

each composite sample.

8. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M.

a. Test one set of three field-cured specimens at seven days and one set of two

specimens at 28 days.

b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of

two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

9. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-

cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures

for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

10. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three

consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength,

and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by

more than 500 psi if specified compressive strength is 5000 psi, or no compressive

strength test value is less than 10 percent of specified compressive strength if specified

compressive strength is greater than 5000 psi.





11. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may

be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of

concrete.

12. Additional Tests:

a. Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test

results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other

requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect.

b. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of

concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42/C42M or by other

methods as directed by Architect.

1) Acceptance criteria for concrete strength shall be in accordance with

ACI 301 section 1.6.6.3.

13. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

14. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply

with the Contract Documents.

3.14 PROTECTION

A. Protect concrete surfaces as follows:

1. Protect from petroleum stains.

2. Diaper hydraulic equipment used over concrete surfaces.

3. Prohibit vehicles from interior concrete slabs.

4. Prohibit use of pipe-cutting machinery over concrete surfaces.

5. Prohibit placement of steel items on concrete surfaces.

6. Prohibit use of acids or acidic detergents over concrete surfaces.

7. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction

period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering,

recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer.

8. Protect concrete surfaces scheduled to receive surface hardener or polished concrete

finish using Floor Slab Protective Covering.


COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 1



SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Soffit framing.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.

2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work


A. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks.

B. Product Test Reports: For each listed product.

1. Steel sheet.2. Expansion anchors.3. Power-actuated anchors.4. Mechanical fasteners.5. Vertical deflection clips.6. Horizontal drift deflection clips7. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=6242




1. AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc.2. ClarkDietrich Building Systems.3. Custom Stud Inc.4. Formetal Co. Inc.


A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.2. Deflection Limits: As indicated on Drawings

3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside the insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F.

4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows:

B. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, framing shall comply with AISI S100, AISI S200, and the following:

1. Floor and Roof Systems: AISI S210.2. Wall Studs: AISI S211.3. Headers: AISI S212.4. Lateral Design: AISI S213.

C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.3 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1003/A1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating designation as follows:

1. Grade: As required by structural performance.

2.4 INTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges




B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:

C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.

D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows:

E. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web and structure.

2.5 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING

A. Steel Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel joists, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges

B. Steel Joist Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel joist track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:

2.6 CEILING JOIST FRAMING

A. Steel Ceiling Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges

2.7 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from ASTM A1003/A1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated steel sheet, of same grade and coating designation used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

1. Supplementary framing.2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.3. Web stiffeners.4. Anchor clips.5. End clips.6. Foundation clips.7. Gusset plates.8. Stud kickers and knee braces.




9. Joist hangers and end closures.10. Hole-reinforcing plates.11. Backer plates.

2.8 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing; manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

C. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Factory-packaged, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout, complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M, and with a fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.

B. Shims: Load-bearing, high-density, multimonomer, nonleaching plastic; or cold-formed steel of same grade and metallic coating as framing members supported by shims.

C. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members as required.

2.10 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,

pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screws penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads.




4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies by means that prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, conditions, and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire-resistive materials below that required to obtain fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.


A. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200, AISI S202, and manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.




2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners, install according to Shop Drawings, and comply with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

C. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

D. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads equal to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

E. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.

F. Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in framing-assembly members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

G. Fasten hole-reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings.

3.4 INTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.

1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure.2. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure.3. Connect vertical deflection clips to studs and anchor to building structure.4. Connect drift clips to cold-formed steel metal framing and anchor to building structure.

E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.




1. Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs.

2. Strap Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

3. Bar Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges.

G. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.


A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.

3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780/A780M and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.


MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 1



SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Wood blocking and nailers.2. Plywood backing panels.


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking.2. Nailers.

B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species.

C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.




D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

2.3 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch nominal thickness.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A153/A153M.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667.

C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C1002, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

D. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

E. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01 ICC-ES AC58 ICC-ES AC193 or ICC-ES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels.

C. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.

D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.




E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.

F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

H. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.


JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1



SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Urethane joint sealants.2. Acrylic latex sealants.3. Mildew-resistant joint sealants.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.3. Joint-sealant formulation.4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.





A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

2. When joint substrates are wet.3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated.4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications.3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. BASF Corporation.b. Pecora Corporation.c. Polymeric Systems, Inc.d. Schnee-Morehead, Inc., an ITW company.e. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

2.3 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth.

B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.


a. Dow Corning Corporation.b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.c. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation.d. Tremco Incorporated.


http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457013430













2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NF.


a. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation.b. Pecora Corporation.c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).d. Tremco Incorporated.

2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.


a. BASF Corporation.b. Construction Foam Products; a division of Nomaco, Inc.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) Type O (open-cell material) Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

B. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.












PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

B. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.




1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and

replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:




a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT.3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.b. Tile control and expansion joints.c. Vertical joints on exposed surfacesd. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT.3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant movement.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors

windows and elevator entrances.c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex.3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

D. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT.3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.


ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 1



SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Storefront framing.2. Manual-swing entrance doors.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.

2. Include full-size isometric details of each type of vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, showing the following:

a. Joinery, including concealed welds.b. Anchorage.c. Expansion provisions.d. Glazing.e. Flashing and drainage.

3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers.

4. Include point-to-point wiring diagrams showing the following:

a. Power requirements for each electrically operated door hardware.b. Location and types of switches, signal device, conduit sizes, and number and size

of wires.




C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 12-inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:

1. Joinery, including concealed welds.2. Anchorage.3. Expansion provisions.4. Glazing.5. Flashing and drainage.

F. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.

G. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum-framed entrance and storefront.


A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to include in maintenance manuals.

B. Maintenance Data for Structural Sealant: For structural-sealant-glazed storefront to include in maintenance manuals. Include ASTM C1401 recommendations for post-installation-phase quality-control program.





A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.

1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

C. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C1401 for design and installation of storefront systems.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures, including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering.d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.e. Failure of operating components.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront system, including framing spandrel panels and accessories, from single manufacturer.





A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure, including, but not limited to, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Failure also includes the following:

a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.b. Glass breakage.c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.e. Failure of operating units.

B. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components to less than 1/8 inch.

3. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, as follows:

a. Perpendicular to Plane of Wall: No greater than 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches or 1/175 times span, for spans of less than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches.

D. Structural: Test according to ASTM E330/E330M as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors, do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors and anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.




E. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E283 for infiltration as follows:

1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:

a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..

2. Entrance Doors:a. Pair of Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq.ft. at a static-air-pressure

differential of 1.57 lbf/sq.ft.

b. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..

F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E331 as follows:

1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas, including entrance doors, when tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..

G. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Test according to AAMA 501.1 as follows:

1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested at dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..

2. Maximum Water Leakage: According to AAMA 501.1. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters, or water that is drained to exterior.

H. Seismic Performance: Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Seismic Drift Causing Glass Fallout: Complying with criteria for passing based on building occupancy type when tested according to AAMA 501.6 at design displacement.

I. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:

1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas as a system shall have U-factor of not more than 0.29 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100.

2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Fixed glazing and framing areas as a system shall have SHGC of no greater than 0.22 as determined according to NFRC 200.

3. Visual Transmittance (VT): Fixed and framing area shall have VT of no less than 0.45 as determined according to NRFC 200.

4. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas as a system shall have an NFRC-certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 25 as determined according to NFRC 500.




J. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

K. Structural-Sealant Joints:

1. Designed to carry gravity loads of glazing.

L. Structural Sealant: ASTM C1184. Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by structural-sealant-glazed, aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before adhesive failure.

1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no sealant material behind.

2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate from each substrate, because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal strength.

2.3 STOREFRONT SYSTEMS

A. Basis of Design: Kawneer TRIFAB VG 451T Framing System – 2” x 4-1/2” nominal dimension, Thermal, Center positioned glazing, or approved equal.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of curtain wall systems, including framing, spandrel panels, entrances, sun control, curtainwall, and accessories from single manufacturer.

C. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Exterior Framing Construction: Thermally broken.2. Interior Vestibule and Interior Storefront Framing Construction: Nonthermal.3. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.4. Finish: AAMA 2605, Fluropolymer Coating, Color as selected by Architect.5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.6. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish

indicated.7. Steel Reinforcement: As required by manufacturer.

D. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.

E. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.




F. Insulated Spandrel Panels: Laminated, metal-faced flat panels with no deviations in plane exceeding 0.8 percent of panel dimension in width or length.

1. Overall Panel Thickness: As indicated.

2. Glazing: Same as adjacent aluminum-framed entrances and storefront glazing.

3. Finish: Match adjacent aluminum-framed entrances and storefront finish.

2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE

A. Entrance Door Hardware: Comply with Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

2.5 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.

C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.

D. Structural Glazing Sealants: ASTM C1184 chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact; specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer for use in storefront system indicated.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

E. Weatherseal Sealants: ASTM C920 for Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and O; chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and structural-sealant-glazed storefront manufacturers for this use.

1. Color: Match structural sealant.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing

system.




B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.

1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M requirements.

C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances.5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior.6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

E. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary support device to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures.

F. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using head-and-sill-receptor system with shear blocks at intermediate horizontal members.

G. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.




2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors.

H. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge.

2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.

I. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.

J. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Structural Sealant: Perform quality-control procedures complying with ASTM C1401 recommendations, including, but not limited to, assembly material qualification procedures, sealant testing, and assembly fabrication reviews and checks.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces that are in contact with structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.




3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.2. Do not install damaged components.3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers.

2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed, as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," to produce weathertight installation.

D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.

F. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

G. Install weatherseal sealant according to Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

H. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping.

2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.


A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the following maximum tolerances:




1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.3. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.

b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch.

c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch.

4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length.

3.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Entrance Door Hardware:

1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware.


DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1



SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Mechanical and Electrical door hardware for the following:

a. Swinging doors.

2. Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections.

B. Products furnished under this Section include the products listed below. Coordinating and scheduling the purchase and delivery of these products remain requirements of this Section.

1. Permanent cores and keys.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following:

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include the following:

a. System schematic.b. Point-to-point wiring diagram.c. Riser diagram.d. Elevation of each door.

2. Detail interface between electrified door hardware and security system.3. Operation Narrative: Describe the operation of doors controlled by electrified

door hardware.

C. Other Action Submittals:

1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.




a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents.

b. Content: Include the following information:

1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame.

2) Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule.

3) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product.

4) Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and interfaces with other building control systems.

2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of hardware consultant, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks.


A. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as follows:

1. For door hardware, an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC).

B. Source Limitations: Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.

C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated, provide door hardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. Provide to the greatest extent possible plug connector applications. Furnish wire harnesses for internal transfers and as required for access system final connections.

E. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meet requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. at the tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg of water.




F. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

G. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines ICC/ANSI A117.1.

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.

2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:

a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door.

b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2; Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch high.

4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.

H. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site.

B. Tag each item with identification related to the final door hardware sets, and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package.

C. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware along with connections to power supplies and security system.




1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Locksets: Five years from date of substantial Completion.b. Exit Devices: Five years from date of substantial Completion.c. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" to comply with requirements in this Section.

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturers' products. Products complying with BHMA designations referenced.

2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article.

2.2 HINGES

A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow-metal doors and hollow-metal frames. Provide 5 knuckle ball bearing design. Provide with additional features as scheduled. Provide electric modifications as indicated, UL Listed.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by following:




a. Bommer Industries (BB)b. Hager Hinge Co.; (BB)c. IVES Hardware; an Allegion Company. (5BB)d. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (TB)e. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of Stanley Security Solutions. (FBB)

2.3 CONTINUOUS HINGES

A. Continuous Hinges: BHMA A156.26; minimum 0.120-inch- (3.0-mm-) thick, hinge leaves with minimum overall width of 4 inches (102 mm); fabricated to full height of door and frame and to template screw locations; with components finished after milling and drilling are complete.

B. Continuous, Gear-Type Hinges: Extruded-aluminum, pinless, geared hinge leaves joined by a continuous extruded-aluminum channel cap; with concealed, self-lubricating thrust bearings. Provide for rated assemblies UL Listed.

1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. ABH Manufacturing, Inc.b. Hager Hinge Co.c. IVES Hardware; an Allegion Company.d. McKinney Products Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.e. Stanley Commercial Hardware.

2.1 LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERAL

A. Accessibility Requirements: Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1. FED-STD-795, "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards."

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.

B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not require more than 15 lbfo release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

C. Lock Trim:

1. Levers: Cast, plated to finish specified.2. Escutcheons: Wrought3. Lockset Designs: Provide design indicated.

D. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows:

1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch latchbolt throw.2. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch bolt throw.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456815253&mf=04&src=wd




E. Backset: 2-3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latchbolt or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, and as follows:

1. Strikes for Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2.

G. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets comply with the following:

1. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2.

H. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2, Grade 1; Series 4000.

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Best Access; a Dormakaba Group company. 9K Seriesb. Sargent Manufacturing; an Assa Abloy Group company. 11-Linec. Schlage Lock; an Allegion Group company. ND Series

2.2 AUXILIARY LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5 Grade 2.


a. Best Access; a Dormakaba Group company. b. Sargent Manufacturing; an Assa Abloy Group company. c. Schlage Lock; an Allegion Group company.

2.3 EXIT DEVICES

A. Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1

B. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1.

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22 N).

C. Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Exit devices shall not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.




D. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.

E. Fire Exit Devices: Devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252.

F. Electro Mechanical Exit Devices: BHMA A156.25 and comply with all other standards listed; devices to have motor-drive latch retraction operation. Furnish auxiliary components as scheduled or required. Provide boxed power supplies listed for use with product.

G. Outside Trim: Lever with cylinder, Pull with cylinder; material and finish to match locksets, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Match design for locksets and latchsets, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Through Bolts: For exit devices and trim on all types of doors.

I. Available Manufacturers:

1. Detex Security; 10 / 20 Series Series2. Precision Hardware; a Dormakaba Group company. 2000 Series3. Sargent Manufacturing; an Assa Abloy Group company. 19-80 Series

2.4 LOCK CYLINDERS

A. Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following:

1. Number of Pins: Seven.2. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover-type cam.3. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece,

and raised trim ring.

2.5 KEYING

A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference, and as follows:

1. Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master key, and a grand master key.

B. Keys: Nickel silver.

1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation:

a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE."




2. Quantity: Provide the following:

a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three.b. Master Keys: Five.c. Grand Mater Keys: Five.d. Control Keys: Two.

3. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys.

a. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed.

C. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches.

2.6 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Key Control Cabinet: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1; metal cabinet with baked-enamel finish; containing key-holding hooks, labels, 2 sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of 150 percent of the number of locks.

1. Wall-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet with hinged-panel door equipped with key-holding panels and pin-tumbler cylinder door lock.


a. Key Control Systems, Inc.b. Lund Equipment Co., Inc.c. MMF Industries.d. Sunroc Corporation.

B. Key Lock Boxes: Designed for storage of two keys. See drawings for locations

1. Available Manufacturer:

a. Knox Company. RM3200 Series.

2.7 SURFACE CLOSERS

A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; Fack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide non-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.





a. Stanley Door Closers; a Dormakaba Group company. CLD-4550 / 3550 Sereis

b. Sargent Manufacturing; an Assa Abloy Group company. 351 / 1431 Seriesc. Norton Door Controls; an Assa Abloy Group company. 7500 / 8500

Series.

2.8 OPERATING TRIM

A. Standard: BHMA A156.6.

B. Materials: Fabricate from stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. Provide with Anti-microbial finish.

C. Available Manufacturers:

1. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated.2. Hager Companies3. Hiawatha, Inc. 4. Ives Hardware.5. Rockwood Manufacturing Company.6. Trimco.

2.9 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS

A. Size: 2 inches (51 mm) less than door width on push side and 1 inch (25 mm) less than door width on pull side, by height specified in door hardware sets.

B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard self-tapping countersunk screws.

C. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; beveled top and 2 sides; fabricated from the following material:

1. Material: 0.050-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel.2. Available Manufacturers:

a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated.b. Hager Companies.c. Hiawatha, Inc.d. Ives Hardware; an Allegion Company.e. Rockwood Manufacturing Company.f. Trimco.

2.10 STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16 Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated.

1. Provide Wall stops for doors unless floor or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders.




B. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 1/2 inch (13 mm); fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.


a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated.b. Don-Jo Manufacturingc. Hiawatha, Inc.d. Ives Hardware; an Allegion Company.e. Rockwood Manufacturing Company.f. Trimco.

2.11 DOOR GASKETINGA. Standard: BHMA A156.22.

B. General: Provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners as indicated.

1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

2. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.

C. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283.

D. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke-control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.

1. Provide smoke-labeled gasketing on 20-minute-rated doors and on smoke-labeled doors.

2. Test Pressure: After 5 minutes into the test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 inches or less above the sill.

E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

F. Gasketing Materials: ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702.

G. Available Manufacturers:

1. National Guard Products.2. Pemko Manufacturing3. Reese Enterprises.




2.12 THRESHOLDS

A. Standard: BHMA A156.21

B. Accessibility Requirements: Where thresholds are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1.

1. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.

C. Thresholds for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Maximum 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.

D. Provide Heavy Duty cast quality type as listed.

E. Provide stainless steel fasteners and lead shields for all thresholds.

F. Available Manufacturers:

1. National Guard Products.2. Pemko Manufacturing3. Reese Enterprises.

2.13 FABRICATION

A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.

2. Fire-Rated Applications:

a. Wood or Machine Screws: For the following:

1) Hinges mortised to doors or frames; use threaded-to-the-head wood screws for wood doors and frames.

2) Strike plates to frames.3) Closers to doors and frames.




b. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided:

1) Surface hinges to doors.2) Closers to doors and frames.3) Surface-mounted exit devices.

3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors.4. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2,

"Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors."5. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications

and elsewhere as indicated.

2.14 FINISHES

A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule.

B. Provide Levers, Push/Pull Trim, Exit Devices with anti-microbial finish.

C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors."

C. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural

Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."

D. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.




1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

E. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

F. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.

G. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. No not cut, notch or otherwise destroy the integrity of aluminum housing mounted seals. Install before other surface mounted hardware and template accordingly.

H. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings and verify location with Architect.

1. Configuration: Provide number of power supplies required to adequately serve doors with electrified door hardware.

I. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

3.2 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

Manufacturer List

Code NameAB ABH Mfg.BE Best Access SystemsDM Dorma Door ControlsNA National GuardPE PemkoPR PrecisionRO RockwoodSD Stanley Door ClosersSE Security Door ControlsSH Stanley Commercial HardwareST StanleyRC Rutherford ControlsTR Trimco




Finish List

Code DescriptionAL Aluminum600 Primed for Painting626 Satin Chromium Plated630 Satin Stainless Steel689 Aluminum Painted626 Weatherized Satin ChromeGREY GreySTNN Satin ChromeUS26D Chromium Plated, DullUS32D Stainless Steel, Dull

Hardware Sets

SET #100- Doors : 102B

2 Continuous Hinge 661HD-EPT DB ST1 Elec. Exit Device MLR TS C 2601 613 PR1 Elec. Exit Device MLR TS C 2603 x 4903A 613 PR1 Rim Cylinder 12E-72 PATD 613 BE2 Door Closer CLD-4551 CS 695 SD2 Drop Plate P45-180D 695 SD2 Space Bracket P45HD-110 695 SD2 Support Shoe P45HD-112 695 SD2 Power Transfer EPT-12C PR1 Power Supply RPSMLR2 PR1 Mortise Cylinder (Dogg) 1E-74 PATD 613 BE2 Door Position Switch DPS601 Threshold 425 DKB x MS/LA NA

Note: Doors to be unlocked/Locked during certain parts of the day. Free egress always

SET #101 Doors: 102a

2 Continuous Hinge 661HD-EPT DB ST1 Elec. Exit Device MLR TS 2601 613 PR1 Elec. Exit Device MLR TS 2603 x 4903A 613 PR1 Rim Cylinder 12E-72 PATD 613 BE1 Operator ED 900 PR 613 DM2 Power Transfer EPT-12C PR1 Power Supply RPSMLR2 PR1 Mortise Cylinder (Dogg) 1E-74 PATD 613 BE




1 ADA Actuator (Wave) 910TC RC1 Card Reader By Others2 Door Position Switch DPS601 Threshold 425 DKB x MS/LA NA

Note: Card Reader Activates Device and Actuator Allows opening 102A and 101C to open in unison. Free Egress always

SET #102 Doors 101C

2 Continuous Hinge 662HD DB ST2 Push Plate 1741 613 RO2 Pull Bar AP413 J 48" 613 TR1 Operator ED 900 PR 695 DM1 ADA Actuator (Wave) 910TC RC

Note: Actuator Allows opening 102A and 101C to open in unison. Free Egress always

SET #103 Doors 101A, 101B, 101D

2 Continuous Hinge 662HD DB ST2 Push Plate 1741 613 RO2 Pull Bar AP413 J 48" 613 TR2 Door Closer CLD-4551 CS 695 SD2 Drop Plate P45-180D 695 SD2 Space Bracket P45HD-110 695 SD2 Support Shoe P45HD-112 695 SD


GLAZING 088000 - 1



SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Glass for doors and storefront framing.2. Glazing sealants and accessories.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.



B. Glass Samples: For each type of the following products; 12 inches square.

C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For sealants, in 12-inch lengths.

D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Product Certificates: For glass.

B. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.

C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

B. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

GLAZING 088000 - 2



C. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C1021 to conduct the testing indicated.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc.2. Guardian Glass; SunGuard.3. Hartung Glass Industries.4. Pilkington North America.






GLAZING 088000 - 3



5. Viracon, Inc.

B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E1300.

C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick.2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall

unit and for each lite.3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.

B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E2190.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary sealants.2. Perimeter Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.


GLAZING 088000 - 4



3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both.

2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.

2.6 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks:

1. Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers:

1. Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks:

GLAZING 088000 - 5



1. Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness per manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

2.8 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.

a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

GLAZING 088000 - 6



B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance.

C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

GLAZING 088000 - 7



K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to

GLAZING 088000 - 8



produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

3.8 GLASS SCHEDULE

A. See glazing types on AE110

B. Insulated glass1. Basis of design product: Vitro Architectural Glass, Solarban 90 Solar Control Low-E

Glass or approved equal.

GLAZING 088000 - 9




GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1



SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.



B. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory indicated.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C1396/C1396M.


a. American Gypsum.b. CertainTeed Corporation.c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.d. National Gypsum Company.e. PABCO Gypsum.f. USG Corporation.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.3. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling.

B. Flexible Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness.


a. CertainTeed Corporation.b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.c. National Gypsum Company.d. PABCO Gypsum.e. USG Corporation.

2. Thickness: 1/4 inch.3. Long Edges: Tapered.

















C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M.



2. Thickness: 1/2 inch.3. Long Edges: Tapered.

D. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.



2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.3. Long Edges: Tapered.4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D3274.

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc.2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead.b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.c. Expansion (control) joint.d. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.


















2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C475/C475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer.

2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C1002 unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

C. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

D. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E90.





a. Accumetric LLC.b. Everkem Diversified Products, Inc.c. Franklin International.d. Grabber Construction Products.e. Hilti, Inc.f. Pecora Corporation.g. Specified Technologies, Inc.h. USG Corporation.

E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.













F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C919 and with manufacturer's written instructions for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated.2. Flexible Type: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies.3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.4. Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.5. Glass-Mat Interior Type: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.




3. On Z-shaped furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. On Z-shaped furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers with screws; fasten face layers with adhesive and supplementary fasteners.

D. Curved Surfaces:

1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible, across curved surface plus 12-inch- long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them.

2. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches o.c.

3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.

B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.




B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.3. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.

3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile and substrate for acoustical tile.3. Level 3: Utility spaces and where indicated on Drawings.4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

E. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board.

F. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.




C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.


ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123 - 1



SECTION 095123 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Acoustical tiles for interior ceilings.2. Fully concealed, direct-hung, suspension systems.

B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete.





B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches in size.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of sizes indicated below:

1. Acoustical Tiles: Set of full-size Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.2. Concealed Suspension-System Members: 6-inch- long Sample of each type.3. Exposed Moldings and Trim: Set of 6-inch- long Samples of each type and color.4. Seismic Clips: Full size.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic restraints for ceiling systems.

1. Include design calculations for seismic restraints including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.





A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension-system members.2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.

a. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose installation is specified in other Sections.

4. Carrying channels or other supplemental support for hanger-wire attachment where conditions do not permit installation of hanger wires at required spacing.

5. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.6. Items penetrating finished ceiling and ceiling-mounted items including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures.b. Diffusers.c. Grilles.d. Speakers.e. Sprinklers.f. Access panels.g. Perimeter moldings.

7. Show operation of hinged and sliding components adjacent to acoustical tiles.8. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling suspension system and anchor and fastener type, from ICC-ES.

E. Field quality-control reports.


A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed

component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.





A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings.2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical tile ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical tile ceiling installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations:

1. Suspended Acoustical Tile Ceilings: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling tile and its suspension system from single source from single manufacturer.

2. Directly Attached Acoustical Tile Ceilings: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling tile from single source from single manufacturer.





A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design seismic restraints for ceiling systems.

B. Seismic Performance: Suspended ceilings shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E1264.2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

D. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL TILES (A1)

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.2. CertainTeed Corporation.3. USG Corporation.

B. Acoustical Tile Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E1264 classifications as designated by type, form, pattern, acoustical rating, and light reflectance unless otherwise indicated.

C. Match existing acoustical ceiling tile, coordinate with Architect to investigate project site to make recommendation for match.

D. Classification: Provide tiles as follows:

1. Type and Form: Match existing.2. Pattern: Match existing.

E. Color: White.

F. Light Reflectance (LR): Not less than 0.75.

G. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): Not less than 20.








H. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than 0.70.

I. Articulation Class (AC): Not less than 170.

J. Edge/Joint Detail: Match existing.

K. Thickness: Match existing.

L. Modular Size: 24” x 24”.

2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM


1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.2. USG Corporation.

B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, fully concealed, metal suspension system and accessories of type, structural classification, and finish indicated that complies with applicable requirements in ASTM C635/C635M.

1. High-Humidity Finish: Where indicated, provide coating tested and classified for "severe environment performance" according to ASTM C635/C635M.

C. Direct-Hung, Double-Web Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from and capped with cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized, G30 coating designation.

1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system.2. Access: Upward and end pivoted or side pivoted, with initial access openings of size

indicated below and located throughout ceiling within each module formed by main and cross runners, with additional access available by progressively removing remaining acoustical tiles.

a. Initial Access Opening: In each module, 24 by 24 inches.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Match existing acoustical ceiling installation, coordinate with Architect to investigate project site to make recommendation for match. Recommend necessary accessories as needed.








B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C635/C635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488/E488M or ASTM E1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

a. Type: Postinstalled bonded anchors.b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated according to

ASTM B633, Class SC 1 (mild) service condition.c. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F593 and

ASTM F594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316.

2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires as follows:

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A580/A580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic.3. Size: Wire diameter sufficient for its stress at three times hanger design load

(ASTM C635/C635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but not less than 0.135-inch- diameter wire.

D. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

E. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

F. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A653/A653M, G90 coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- diameter bolts.

G. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate seismic forces.

H. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate lateral forces.

I. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed to secure acoustical tiles in-place during a seismic event.




2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

A. Match existing acoustical ceiling tile installation, coordinate with Architect to investigate project site to make recommendation for match. Recommend necessary metal edge moldings and trim as needed.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.2. CertainTeed Corporation.3. USG Corporation.

C. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations complying with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for of suspension-system runners.

1. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.

2. Finish: Match existing.

D. Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's extruded-aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips, complying with seismic design requirements.

1. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.2. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply

with ASTM C635/C635M and coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 079219 "Acoustical Joint Sealants."


A. Acoustical Tile Adhesive: Type recommended in writing by acoustical tile manufacturer, bearing UL label for Class 0-25 flame spread.

B. Staples: 5/16-inch- long, divergent-point staples.








PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which acoustical tile ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine acoustical tiles before installation. Reject acoustical tiles that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Testing Substrates: Before adhesively bonding tiles to wet-placed substrates such as cast-in-place concrete or plaster, test and verify that moisture level is below tile manufacturer's recommended limits.

B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders unless otherwise indicated, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

C. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

A. Install suspended acoustical tile ceilings according to ASTM C636/C636M, seismic design requirements, and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Fire-Rated Assembly: Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested fire-rated design.

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.




4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly to structure or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.

7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from

hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member.

11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical tiles as follows:

1. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.2. Install tiles with pattern running in one direction parallel to long axis of space.3. Install tiles in a basket-weave pattern.

G. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. Place splines or suspension-system flanges into kerfed edges of tiles so tile-to-tile joints are interlocked.




1. Fit adjoining tiles to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut tiles for accurate fit at borders and around penetrations through ceiling.

2. Hold tile field in compression by inserting leaf-type, spring-steel spacers between tiles and moldings, spaced 12 inches o.c.

3. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts according to requirements indicated for fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF DIRECTLY ATTACHED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

A. Adhesive Installation: Install acoustical tile by bonding to substrate, using acoustical tile adhesive and procedure recommended in writing by tile manufacturer and as follows:

1. Wipe and prime ceiling.2. Remove loose dust from backs of tiles by brushing.3. Install splines in joints between tiles and maintain bottom surface to a uniform level.

Shim tile or correct substrate as required to maintain levelness.4. Maintain tight butt joints, aligned in both directions and coordinated with ceiling fixtures.

B. Stapled Installation: Fasten acoustical tile to substrate using a minimum of two staples per tile that are installed in flanges of tile and as follows:

1. Form double-lapped joint between tiles by securely pressing tile tongues into corresponding tile grooves.

2. Maintain bottom surface of tiles to a uniform level. Shim tile or correct substrate as required to maintain levelness.

3. Maintain tight butt joints, aligned in both directions and coordinated with ceiling fixtures.

C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units.

D. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical tiles with pattern running in one direction parallel to long axis of space.


A. Suspended Ceilings: Install main and cross runners level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, non-cumulative.

B. Directly Attached Ceilings: Install bottom surface of tiles to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet and not exceeding 1/4 inch cumulatively.

C. Moldings and Trim: Install moldings and trim to substrate and level with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, non-cumulative.





A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Periodic inspection during the installation of suspended ceiling grids according to ASCE/SEI 7.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections of completed installations of acoustical tile ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners in successive stages and when installation of ceiling suspension systems on each floor has reached 20 percent completion, but no tiles have been installed. Do not proceed with installations of acoustical tile ceiling hangers for the next area until test results for previously completed installations of acoustical tile ceiling hangers show compliance with requirements.

1. Within each test area, testing agency will select one of every 10 power-actuated fasteners and postinstalled anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will test them for 200 lbf of tension; it will also select one of every two postinstalled anchors used to attach bracing wires to concrete and will test them for 440 lbf of tension.

2. When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with requirements, testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested until 20 pass consecutively and then will resume initial testing frequency.

D. Acoustical tile ceiling hangers, anchors, and fasteners will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical tile ceilings, including trim and edge moldings. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage.

B. Remove and replace tiles and other ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.


RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1



SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Thermoset-rubber base.2. Rubber molding accessories.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches long.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long.

E. Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.



1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.






1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections.2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.



A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following periods:

1. 48 hours before installation.2. During installation.3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 All materials are subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by another manufacturer. Products from other manufacturers must be pre-approved prior to bid date and should be delivered to GSBS for Architect and Owner review. Allow 5 working days for review. Submitted products will be evaluated for approval based on comparable construction makeup, as well as design aesthetic.




2.2 THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE (RB2)


1. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company.2. Roppe Corporation, USA.

B. Basis of Design – Roppe, Pinnacle – Standard Toe.

C. Product Standard: ASTM F1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid, homogeneous).

1. Style and Location:

a. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas indicated.

D. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

E. Height: As indicated on Drawings.

F. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

G. Outside Corners: Job formed.

H. Inside Corners: Job formed.

I. Colors: See drawings.

2.3 RUBBER MOLDING ACCESSORY (Rubber edge guard for carpet)

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Roppe Corporation, USA.

B. Basis of Design – Roppe #42 Custom Carpet Edging 3/16”.

C. Description: Rubber carpet edge guard for glue-down applications.

D. Profile and Dimensions: #42 Custom Carpet Edging 3/16”.

E. Locations: See drawings.

F. Color: To match RB1









2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish, nominal 2 inches wide, of height required to protect exposed edges of flooring, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.




3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length.

a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length.

a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints.

3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces.2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly.3. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil.




C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from resilient stair treads before applying liquid floor polish.

1. Apply two coat(s).

E. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.


TILE CARPETING 096813 - 1



SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Modular carpet tile.


1. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for removing existing floor coverings.2. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories

installed with carpet tile.



1. Review methods and procedures related to carpet tile installation including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures.b. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures.c. Review subfloor preparation procedures.



1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance.

2. Include manufacturer's written installation recommendations for each type of substrate.

B. Shop Drawings: For carpet tile installation, plans showing the following:

1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles.

2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot.




3. Type of subfloor.4. Type of installation.5. Pattern of installation.6. Pattern type, location, and direction.7. Pile direction.8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders.9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.10. Transition details to other flooring materials.

C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample.2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- long Samples.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of carpet tile.

1. Include Samples of exposed edge, transition, and other accessory stripping involving color or finish selection.

E. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample.2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- long Samples.

F. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

G. Sustainable Product Certification: Provide ANSI/NSF 140 certification for carpet products.



B. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.

2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.






1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd..


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockups at locations and in sizes shown on Drawings.2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104.


A. Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.




1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.


a. More than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, and runs.b. Dimensional instability.c. Excess static discharge.d. Loss of tuft-bind strength.e. Loss of face fiber.f. Delamination.g. See University of Utah’s Design Requirements for guarantees.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Basis of Design: All materials are subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by another manufacturer. Products from other manufacturers must be pre-approved prior to bid date and should be delivered to GSBS for Architect and Owner review. Allow 5 working days for review. Submitted products will be evaluated for approval based on comparable construction makeup, as well as design aesthetic.

2.2 CARPET TILE (CT1)


1. Mohawk Group (The); Mohawk Carpet, LLC.

B. Basis of Design – Mohawk, First Step II QL315 or approved equal.

C. Color: See drawings.

D. Installation: Monolithic.

E. Fiber Content: Solution dyed nylon.

F. Fiber Type: Colorstrand SD Nylon.

G. Density: 6,580.

H. Stitches: 12.0 per inch.

I. Gauge: 1/12.

J. Total Pile Weight: 17 oz/sq yd for finished carpet tile.

K. Primary Backing/Backcoating: Manufacturer's standard composite material, EcoFlex Matrix.

L. Size: 24 by 24 inches.






M. Applied Treatments:

1. Soil-Release Treatment: Sentry Soil Protection.2. Stain Release Treatment: Sentry Plus Stain Protection.

2.3 CARPET TILE (CT5)


1. Mohawk Group (The); Mohawk Carpet, LLC.

B. Basis of Design – Mohawk, Enlivened BT455 / QB455 or approved equal.

C. Color: See drawings.

D. Installation: Monolithic.

E. Fiber Content: Solution dyed nylon.

F. Fiber Type: Colorstrand SD Nylon.

G. Density: 6,580.

H. Stitches: 12.0 per inch.

I. Gauge: 1/12.

J. Total Pile Weight: 17 oz/sq yd for finished carpet tile.

K. Primary Backing/Backcoating: Manufacturer's standard composite material, EcoFlex Matrix.

L. Size: 24 by 24 inches.

M. Applied Treatments:

1. Soil-Release Treatment: Sentry Soil Protection.2. Stain Release Treatment: Sentry Plus Stain Protection.

2.4 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile, and are recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.






C. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of profile and width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.

1. Basis of Design: Schluter – RENO-U or pre-approved equal.2. Height: as required for carpet height.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance.

B. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

C. Concrete Slabs: Verify that finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and that surfaces are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.

1. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas.

a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

c. Perform additional moisture tests recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

D. Wood Subfloors: Verify the following:

1. Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in Section 061600 "Sheathing."

2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with adhesive bond or show through surface.

E. Metal Subfloors: Verify the following:

1. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with adhesive bond or show through surface.




F. Painted Subfloors: Perform bond test recommended in writing by adhesive manufacturer.

1. Access Flooring Systems: Verify the following:2. Access floor substrate is compatible with carpet tile and adhesive if any.3. Underlayment surface is flat, smooth, evenly planed, tightly jointed, and free of

irregularities, gaps greater than 1/16 inch (See U’s design requirement document), protrusions more than 1/32 inch, and substances that may interfere with adhesive bond or show through surface.

G. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104 and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/16 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers.

D. Metal Substrates: Clean grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if recommended in writing by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive.

E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104, Section 10, "Carpet Tile," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

C. Maintain dye-lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.

D. Maintain pile-direction patterns indicated on Drawings.

E. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.




F. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on carpet tile as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.

I. Access Flooring: Stagger joints of carpet tiles so carpet tile grid is offset from access flooring panel grid. Do not fill seams of access flooring panels with carpet adhesive; keep seams free of adhesive.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1. Remove excess adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104, Section 13.7.

C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.


INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1



SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates:

1. Gypsum board and Plaster2. Steel3. Concrete4. Acoustical Panels


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.2. Label each coat of each Sample.

D. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.



1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.





A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Behr Process Corporation.2. Benjamin Moore & Co.3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product listed in the Interior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.








B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent.2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

F. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.




3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:

a. Equipment, including panelboards.b. Uninsulated metal piping.c. Uninsulated plastic piping.d. Pipe hangers and supports.e. Metal conduit.f. Plastic conduit.g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering

or other paintable jacket material.h. Other items as directed by Architect.

2. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.





A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 3.1M:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149.b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat.c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss

Level 4), MPI #146.

B. Steel Substrates:

1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 5.1R:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76.b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching

topcoat.c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss

Level 5), MPI #141.




C. Gypsum Board and Plaster Substrates:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 9.2M:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149.b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat.c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss

Level 4), MPI #146.

D. Acoustic Panels and Tiles:

1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 9.3D:

a. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat.b. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss

Level 4), MPI #146.


TABLE OF CONTENT 1




TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION

NUMBER TITLE

23 05 00 Basic Mechanical Requirements

23 05 29 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods

23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

23 07 00 Mechanical Insulation

23 37 13 Air Inlets and Outlets

23 57 00 Heat Transfer

BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 05 00 – 1




SECTION 23 05 00 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Basic requirements common to the work in general of Division 21/22/23 and other Divisions and

Sections of the Specification where referenced.

B. Provide, unless specified otherwise, all labor, materials and equipment necessary for completely

finished and operational mechanical systems described and specified under Division 21/22 and

other Sections of this Division 23.

C. Provide all minor incidental items such as offsets, fittings, and accessories required as part of the

work even though not specified or indicated.

D. Inspection: Inspect work preceding or interfacing with work of Division 21/22/23 and report any

known or observed defects that affect the Work to the Construction Manager/General Contractor.

Do not proceed with the work until defects are corrected.

E. Existing Utilities: Are indicated as accurately as possible on the Drawings. Close openings and

repair damage in acceptable manner to utilities encountered. This Contractor shall be responsible

for field surveying all aspects of existing conditions prior to bid date. Change orders will not be

issued for a failure to review existing conditions which affect Division 21/22/23 work.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Requirements: Provide Basic Requirements in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.3 UTILITIES, EXTENSIONS, CONNECTIONS AND FEES FOR WATER AND SEWER

A. Provide all building services extensions and connections to off-site and on-site utilities.

B. Sewer connection charges, typically based on fixture units, that in principle allow the right to

obtain the sewer services from the utility will be arranged and paid for by the Division 23

Contractor, and Site Utilities Contractor. To be paid for by the Site Utilities Contractor.

C. Water system development fees, typically based on meter size, that in principle allow the right to

obtain the water services from the utility will be arranged and paid for by the Site Utilities

Contractor.

D. Sewer tap fees as they are known to the trade and are the charges for actual materials and labor for

tapping, inspection and recording of the tap shall be arranged and paid for by the Site Utilities

Contractor.

E. Water tap fees as they are known to the trade and are the charges for actual materials and labor for

tapping, inspection and recording of the tap shall be arranged and paid for by the Site Utilities

Contractor.





F. In the event that the serving utility company installs their own taps, service, meters, etc., all costs

imposed by this action shall be paid for by the Division 23 Contractor. Extensions from

termination points to connection with building services and systems will be the responsibility of

the Division 23 Contractor.

G. Be responsible for all pads, vaults, manholes, manhole covers, meter enclosures, valves, services

boxes, and the like, all in conformance with requirements of the serving utility company.

H. In the event that the water service to the building is a combination domestic and fire protection

service, the responsibility of said "combination service" to the point of domestic connection shall

be that of a licensed Fire Protection Contractor, including tap, valves, excavation, backfill,

compaction and meters, if any. After point of domestic connection, responsibility for separate fire

and domestic services is with appropriate trades including all labor and materials as herein before

mentioned.

1. Contractor shall coordinate with other trades all interface piping and types of connections

to be provided for interface.

2. Provide fire hydrant, auxiliary gate valve, tapping sleeve and valve or tee, service boxes,

and anchor or swivel couplings, thrust blocks, deadmen, rods, and the like, all in

conformance with the requirements of serving utility company.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. General:

1. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal Standards,

comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are

specified or are required by applicable codes.

2. The date of the standard is that in effect at the date of the Contract Documents, except

when a specific date is specified.

3. When required by individual Specification sections, obtain copy of standard. Maintain

copy at job site during work until substantial completion.

4. Also reference Section 01 3563 “High Performance Building Standard” and Section 01

5721 “Indoor Air Quality Controls”.

B. Schedule of Referenced Organizations: The following is a list of the acronyms of organizations

referenced in these Specifications:

ADC Air Diffusion Council

1000 E. Woodfield Rd.

Schaumburg, IL 60173

www.flexibleduct.org

AGA American Gas Association

400 No. Capitol St. N.W.

Washington, DC 20001

www.aga.org

http://www.flexibleduct.org/

http://www.aga.org/





AMCA Air Movement and Control Association

30 West University Drive

Arlington Heights, IL 60004

www.amca.org

ANSI American National Standards Institute

1819 L Street N.W.

Washington, DC 20036

www.ansi.org

ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute

4301 No. Fairfax Drive.

Arlington, VA 22203

www.ari.org

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning

Engineers

1791 Tullie Circle, N.E.

Atlanta, GA 30329

www.ashrae.org

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

Three Park Avenue

New York, NY 10016

www.asme.org

ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers

8614 W. Catalpa Ave.

Chicago, IL 60656

www.aspe.org

ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering

901 Canterbury

Westlake, OH 44145

www.asse-plumbing.org

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

100 Barr Harbor Dr.

West Conshohoeken, PA 19428

www.astm.org

AWS American Welding Society

550 N.W. LeJeune Rd.

Miami, FL 33126

www.aws.org

AWWA American Water Works Association

6666 West Quincy Avenue

Denver, CO 80235

www.awwa.org

http://www.amca.org/

http://www.ansi.org/

http://www.ari.org/

http://www.ashrae.org/

http://www.asme.org/

http://www.aspe.org/

http://www.asse-plumbing.org/

http://www.astm.org/

http://www.aws.org/

http://www.awwa.org/





CDA Copper Development Association

260 Madison Avenue

New York, NY 10016

www.copper.org

CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute

5959 Shallow Ford Rd., Suite 419

Chattanooga, TN 37421

www.cispi.org

CS Commercial Standard of NBS

(U.S. Dept. of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and

Technology)

Government Printing Office

Washington, D.C. 20402

CTI Cooling Technology Institute

530 Wells Fargo Drive

Houston, TX 77090

www.cti.org

ICC International Code Council

5203 Leesburg Pike, Suite 600

Falls Church, VA 22041

www.intlcode.org

IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials

20001 E. Walnut Drive South

Walnut, CA 91789

www.iapmo.org

NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau

8575 Grovemont Circle

Gaithersburg, MD 20877

www.nebb.org

NEC National Electric Code (of NFPA)

NEMA National Electric Manufacturer’s Association

1300 N. 17th Street

Rosslyn, VA 22209

www.nema.org

NFPA National Fire Protection Association

One Batterymarch Park

P.O. Box 9101

Quincey, MA 02269

www.nfpa.org

http://www.copper.org/

http://www.cispi.org/

http://www.cti.org/

http://www.intlcode.org/

http://www.iapmo.org/

http://www.nebb.org/

http://www.nema.org/

http://www.nfpa.org/





NSF NSF International

789 No. Dixboro Rd.

Ann Arbor, MI 48113

www.nsf.gov

OSHA Occupational Safety Health Administration

(U.S. Dept. of Labor)

Government Printing Office

Washington, D.C. 20402

www.osha.gov

PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute

45 Brystal Drive

South Easton, MA 02375

www.pdionline.org

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning

Contractor’s National Association

4201 Lafayette Center Drive

Chantilly, VA 20151

www.smacna.org

UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

333 Pfingston Rd.

Northbrook, IL 60062

www.ul.com

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. Specification Language Explanation: These Specifications are of abbreviated, simplified or

streamlined type and include incomplete sentences. Omissions of words of phrases such as "the

Contractor shall", "in conformity therewith", "shall be", "as noted on the drawings", "a", "the", are

intentional. Supply when "NOTE" occurs on Drawings. Supply words "shall be" or "shall" by

inference when colon is used with sentences or phrases. Supply words "on the Drawings" by

inference when "as indicated" is used with sentences or phrases. Singular words will be

interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as singular where applicable and where

full context of the Contract Documents so indicates.

B. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term "furnish" is used to mean supply and

deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in

each instance.

C. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term "install" is used to describe operations

at Project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying,

working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable

in each instance.

D. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term "provide" means furnish and install,

complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance.

http://www.nsf.gov/

http://www.osha.gov/

http://www.pdionline.org/

http://www.smacna.org/

http://www.ul.com/





E. Indicated: The term "Indicated" is a cross-reference to graphics, notes or schedules on Drawings,

to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications, and to similar means of recording

requirements in contract documents. Where terms such as "shown", "noted", "scheduled", and

"specified" are used in lieu of "indicated", it is for purpose of helping reader locate

cross-reference, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically noted.

F. General Contractor: The term "General Contractor" used in Division 23 and elsewhere in the

Contract Documents means the party with whom the Owner has executed the Owner-Contractor

Agreement.

G. Approved Equal: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term "approved equal" means that

any materials, equipment, work procedures and techniques shall be either addressed on the

drawing, specifications or addendum by manufacturer or by detailed material description. When

brand names are referenced it implies that only the manufacturers listed are approved. All

approved material, equipment, work procedures, and techniques will be noted in the specifications,

drawings, or by addendum prior to bid date. Items not approved in this manner will not be

considered.


A. Quality Control:

1. Materials and apparatus required for the work to be new and of first-class quality; to be

furnished, delivered, erected, connected and finished in every detail; and to be so selected

and arranged so as to fit properly into the building spaces. Where no specific kind or

quality of material is given, a first-class standard article shall be furnished.

2. Furnish the services of an experienced superintendent, who will be constantly in charge

of the installation of the work, together with all skilled workmen, fitters, metal workers,

certified welders, plumbers, millwrights, sprinkler fitters, drain layers, helpers, and labor

required to unload, transfer, erect, connect, adjust, start, operate and test for each system.

3. Unless otherwise specifically indicated, equipment and materials to be installed in

accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. This includes the

performance of tests as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Proof of Performance:

1. Division 23 Contractor shall provide proof of performance certification of all Mechanical

Equipment and Systems to demonstrate that all Mechanical Equipment and Systems are

operating to the intent of the design. This proof of performance shall include, but shall

not be limited to, actual demonstration of all temperature/pressure control loops,

operation of all heating/cooling equipment and other required tests upon request by the

Engineer or Owner. A signed certificate from the piping, sheet metal, control, and

balancing subcontractors stating that they have personally checked the operation of all

equipment and control loops and that everything under their subcontract is operating as

specified. These certificates shall be furnished to the 230593 Contractor for inclusion in

the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS





A. Execute work per Underwriters, Public Utility, Local and State Codes, Ordinances and applicable

regulations. Obtain and pay for required permits, inspections, and certificates. Notify Architect of

items not meeting said requirements.

B. Comply with editions of all applicable codes, ordinances and regulations in effect at the time of

bid opening including but not necessarily limited to the following:

International Mechanical Code

International Plumbing Code

International Fuel Gas Code

International Energy Conservation Code

State Department of Health Requirements

State Energy Code

National Fire Protection Association Standards

International Fire Code

International Building Code

National Electrical Code NFPA-70

State Boiler Code

Jurisdictional County Health Department

Jurisdictional City Wastewater Management Division or District

Jurisdictional City Water Department

Jurisdictional Water Conservation Standards

C. If discrepancies occur between the Contract Documents and any applicable codes, ordinances,

acts, or standards, the most stringent requirements shall apply.

D. Where hourly fire ratings are indicated or required, provide components and assemblies meeting

requirements of the IBC, and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit items to Commissioning Agent for review.

B. Submit Samples, Shop Drawings and Product Data as required by various Sections of Division

23 in accordance with The General Conditions of the Contract. The Contractor agrees that these

Submittals processed by the Engineer are not Change Orders; that the purpose of these

Submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands

the design concept, that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and

material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods

he intends to use. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between

these Submittals and the Contract Documents in the form of design drawings and specifications

are discovered either prior to or after these Submittals are processed by the Engineer, the Design

Drawings and Specifications shall control and shall be followed.

C. The submittals shall be submitted in a single package with all mechanical equipment for the

project enclosed. The submittals shall be enclosed in a stiff back, 3-ring binder. All mechanical

equipment shall be separated with tabbed index cards with an indexed legend provided in the front

of the binder. In the event submittals are submitted in electronic format, the submittal shall be in

the form of a single PDF file in which all equipment has been electronically bookmarked and all

bookmarks have been identified using the equipment tags used on the drawings. Individual PDF

files for separate pieces of equipment or specification sections will not be accepted.





D. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports as required by various Sections of Division 23 showing

compliance in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract. Signed copies shall be

included in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

E. Operating Instructions and Maintenance Data: Prepare and submit printed operating instructions

and maintenance data in accordance with Operating and Maintenance Data paragraph in this

Section.

F. Submittals will be reviewed and marked as follows:

1. No Exceptions Taken: No action required.

2. Make Corrections Noted: Correct the submittals per notes by engineer and submit new

copies of submittal to contractor for project records. Do not resubmit to engineer.

3. Rejected: Equipment as submitted does not meet requirements of contract documents.

Revise and/or clarify per comments and resubmit to engineer.

4. Submittal Not Requested: Submittal not required per specification. Submittal returned

with no review.

G. Note that the submittal review process does not relieve Contractor from being ultimately

responsible for ensuring that submitted items satisfy all requirements of the Contract Documents.

H. Site Condition and Coordination:

1. Before any ductwork is fabricated or equipment installed and before running and/or

fabricating any lines of piping or ductwork, the Contractor shall provide Architect and

Engineer ¼” scale drawings of all mechanical rooms and main access walkways

coordinated with all trades with submitted equipment and verify all other areas to assure

himself that they can be run and installed as contemplated in cooperation with

Contractors of other Divisions of the Work and the physical constraints of the Structural

and Architectural Work and maintain access walkways are clear for maintenance.

1.9 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions and Prior Approvals: Substitutions and prior approvals will be acceptable only when

the proposed substitute has been submitted to the Engineer and approved through an addendum or

change order. Request for prior approval shall be submitted a minimum of 10 calendar days prior

to bid.

B. Some materials and equipment are specified by manufacturer and catalog numbers. The

manufacturer and catalog numbers are used to establish a degree of quality and style for such

equipment and material.

C. NOTE: When alternate or substitute materials and equipment are used Division 23 Contractor

shall be responsible for engineering/redesign costs, space requirements, configurations,

performance, changes in bases, supports, structural members and openings in structure, electrical

changes and other apparatus and trades that may be affected by their use. Notification of General

Contractor and other affected subcontractors shall be the responsibility of the Division 23

Contractor.

1.10 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS





A. General: Comply with Division 1.

B. Job Site Documents: Maintain at the job site, one record copy of the following:

1. Drawings

2. Specifications

3. Addenda

4. Reviewed Product Submittals and Shop Drawings

5. Field Test Records

Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Maintain documents in clean, dry legible

condition, apart from documents used for construction.

C. Record Information: Label each document "Record Document". Mark information with red ink.

Keep each record current. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information is

recorded.

D. Record following information on Drawings:

1. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities to be dimensioned from column

lines.

2. Dimensioned location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction.

3. Field changes of dimension and detail.

4. Changes by change order or field order.

5. Details not on original contract drawings.

6. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of each product and item of

equipment actually installed shall be indicated on equipment schedules.

E. Record the following information on Specifications:

1. Changes by change order or field order.

2. Other matters not originally specified.

F. Shop Drawings: Maintain shop drawings as record documents recording changes made after

review as specified for drawings above.

G. Submittal: At completion of project, deliver record documents to Owner's representative and

transmit a copy of signed receipt from Owner to the Engineer.

1.11 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. The "Operating and Maintenance Manual" (O & M) is a bound compilation of descriptive

drawings and data which identify equipment installed at the project site and detail the procedures

and parts required to maintain and repair the equipment. Copies of final reviewed submittals shall

be included for all equipment items.

B. These are to be submitted for approval to the Project Manager. Five electronic versions of the

manuals are also required, as described in Paragraph I below.

C. Organization of the manuals shall follow the recommendations in ASHRAE Guideline current

edition.





D. The following information shall appear on the front cover of the CD case:

1. "Operation and Maintenance Manual"

2. Project Name (and volume number if more than one volume)

3. Building name, number, and street address

4. * Architect's name

5. * Engineer's name

6. * General Contractor's name

7. * Mechanical Contractor's name

F. The manual shall include the following:

1. Alphabetical list of all system components including the name, address, and 24-hour

phone number of the company responsible for servicing each item during the first year's

operation.

2. Operating instructions for complete system, including emergency procedures for fire or

failure of major equipment and procedures for normal starting/operating/shutdown and

long-term shutdown

3. Maintenance instructions, including valves, valve tag and other identified equipment lists,

proper lubricants and lubricating instructions for each piece of equipment and necessary

cleaning/replacing/adjusting schedules.

4. All test reports and proof of performance certificates.

5. Manufacturer's data and instruction sheets for each piece of equipment, marked to

indicate the plan symbol, model, number, and options installed for each item of

equipment furnished and installed on the project. These data sheet shall be accompanied

by reviewed submittals that had no exceptions taken to them. Provide original printed

material in each book, faxes are NOT acceptable. The serial numbers of each item of

equipment installed are to be listed with the model numbers and plan symbols.

a. Installation instructions.

b. Drawings and specifications (final shop drawings).

c. Complete parts lists, and a source of supply for each piece of equipment, marked

with model, size, and plan symbol.

d. A copy of the reviewed submittals for each piece of equipment, with any/all

corrections identified during the submittal process made to the final submittal

documents.

e. Performance curves and capacity data, marked with model number, size, and

plan code.

f. Complete “as-builts” wiring and temperature control diagrams. (Shop drawings

are not acceptable).

g. Lubrication and other preventative maintenance data.

h. Equipment warranties.

i. The final balance report.

6. Design Intent Document furnished by Engineer.

7. Include a Table of Contents and tabbed index dividers.

G. In addition to the maintenance manual, and keyed to it, the equipment shall be identified and

tagged as specified on drawings. Insert a copy of the Equipment List or Equipment Schedules in

manual.





1. Identify all starters, disconnect switches, and manually operated controls, except integral

equipment switches. Label with permanently applied, legible markers corresponding to

operating instructions in the "Maintenance Manual".

2. Tag all valves per requirements in Section 230529. Valve tags not required on isolation

valves for terminal equipment such as VAV’s, unit heaters, etc.

3. Provide a typed tag list or schedule laminated or mounted under plexiglass in the

equipment room stating valve ID number, location, service or function of each tagged

item, and normal valve position. Insert a copy of tag list in each "Maintenance Manual".

Also provide one copy of the list in a plastic closure as manufactured by Seton Name

Plant Company, New Haven, Conn; or approved equal. The plastic closure shall include

two holes punched at the top, with a brass or nickel grommet in each hole, and an 8” long

length of nickel plated bead chain run through the holes, allowing the list to be hung from

a wall peg.

4. Provide a reduced scale drawing of each floor indicating the location of each manual and

automatic valve in every HVAC and plumbing piping system and include valve position

number and normal valve position (normally open/normally closed) as per Specification

Section 230529. Mount all drawings under plexiglass or laminate and mount on

equipment room wall.

H. Division 230593 Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling instructional meetings for

maintenance personnel on the proper operation and maintenance of all mechanical systems, using

the maintenance manual as a guide. These meetings must be scheduled through the Architect,

Construction Manager/General Contractor and far enough in advance so that all necessary

personnel can be adequately notified.

1. Submit training certificate to Owner’s Representatives at end of training and have

certificate signed to indicate adequate training has been received.

I. Operating and Maintenance Data documents must be provided in digital format as follows:

1. Provide O&Ms in an intuitive format on a CD-ROM or DVD. Electronic manual

preparation shall be under the direction of an individual or organization that has

demonstrated expertise in the preparation of a comprehensive and complete electronic

operation and maintenance manual. Qualifications shall be submitted for approval. One

source of procurement used on past projects is Emanuals by Scanitall in Sandy, UT (tel.

801-619-2082). This is the responsibility of the Division 21/22/23 contractor.

2. A single CD or DVD to be authored with the latest edition of Adobe Acrobat, and be in a

“non-protected” network accessible format.

3. All information on the CD-ROM or DVD shall be printable on 8.5”x11” or 11”x17”plain

paper.

4. Capture images using OCR technology such that the user can key word search for

information.

5. Provide a hypertext alphabetical index of all equipment and building products. All

hypertext shall be blue in color.

6. Provide 5 copies of the O&M CD-ROM or DVD.

1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. General: Deliver and store materials and equipment in manufacturer's unopened containers fully

identified with manufacturer's name, trade name, type, class, grade, size and color.

B. Protection: Store materials and equipment off the ground and under cover, protected from

damage. Maintain caution labels on hazardous materials.





C. Large Items: Make arrangements with other contractors on the job for introduction into the

building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings.

D. Handling of Materials: Materials shall be handled, sorted and distributed using appropriate

handling methods to protect all materials from damage. Dented, rusted, corroded or otherwise

damaged materials shall be removed from the project site. Lined ductwork on which the liner

becomes wet shall be removed from the project site. Determination of materials deemed unusable

or inappropriate for installation shall be made by the Architect/Engineer.


A. Accessibility:

1. Division 23 Contractor shall be responsible for the sufficiency of the size of shafts and

chases and the adequate clearance in double partitions and hung ceilings for proper

installation of his work. He shall cooperate with Contractors of other Divisions of the

Work whose work is in the same space and shall advise the Construction

Manager/General Contractor of his requirements. Such spaces and clearances shall,

however, be kept to the minimum size required.

2. Division 23 Contractor shall locate all equipment which must be serviced, operated, or

maintained in fully accessible positions. Equipment shall include (but not be limited to)

valves, shock absorbers, traps, cleanouts, motors, controllers, switchgear, filters, VAV

boxes, control valves, balancing valves, and drain points. If required for better

accessibility, furnish access doors for this purpose. Minor deviations from Drawings may

be allowed to provide for better accessibility. Any changes shall be approved by the

Architect/Construction Manager/General Contractor prior to making the change.

3. Division 23 Contractor shall provide the Construction Manager/General Contractor with

the exact locations of access doors for each concealed valve, damper, or other device

requiring service. Locations of these doors shall be submitted in sufficient time to be

installed in the normal course of work.

B. Fabrication:

1. Before any ductwork is fabricated and before running and/or fabricating any lines of piping

or ductwork, the Contractor shall assure himself that they can be run as contemplated in

cooperation with Contractors of other Divisions of the Work and the physical constraints

of the Structural and Architectural Work.

C. Freeze Protection:

1. Do not run lines in outside walls, or locations where freezing may occur. Piping next to

outside walls shall be in furred spaces with insulation between the piping and the outside

wall. Insulation of piping shall not be considered freeze protection. Buried pipe shall be

installed minimum 6” below frost depth, unless noted otherwise in the documents.

D. Scaffolding, Rigging and Hoisting:

1. Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for erection and delivery

into the premises of any equipment and apparatus furnished; remove same from premises

when no longer required.





1.14 COORDINATION

A. General: Coordinate and order the progress of mechanical work to conform to the progress of the

work of the other trades. Complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the building

will permit.

B. Coordination with Electrical Work: Section 230529.

C. Utility Interruptions: Coordinate mechanical utility interruptions with the Owner and the Utility

Company. Plan work so that duration of the interruption is kept to a minimum.

D. Cutting and Patching: Section 230529.

E. Drawings and Specifications: The Mechanical Drawings indicate the general design and

arrangement of lines, equipment, systems, etc. Information shown is diagrammatic in character

and does not necessarily indicate every required offset, fitting, etc. Do not scale the Drawings for

dimensions. Take dimensions, measurements, locations, levels, etc., from the Architectural

Drawings and equipment to be furnished.

F. Each Division 23 subcontractor shall coordinate with other contractors to make certain that any of

his equipment, piping or ductwork which is mounted on isolators or flexibly connected does not

become "grounded" by another contractors work (e.g. walls, ceiling, etc.).

G. Discrepancies: Examine Drawings and Specifications for other parts of the work, and if any

discrepancies occur between the plans for the work of this Division and the plans for the work of

others, report such discrepancies to the Construction Manager/General Contractor and obtain

written instructions for any changes necessary.

H. Order of Precedence: The precedence of mechanical construction documents are as follows:

1. Addenda and modifications to the Drawings and Specifications take precedence over the

original Drawings and Specifications.

2. Should there be a conflict within the Specifications or within Drawings of the same scale,

or between the Specifications and the Drawings, the more stringent or higher quality

requirements shall apply.

3. In the Drawings, the precedence shall be Drawings of larger scale over those of smaller

scale, figured dimensions over scaled dimensions and noted materials over graphic

indications.

4. Should there be a conflict in dimensions or locations between Mechanical Drawings and

Architectural Drawings, the Architectural Drawings shall have precedence.

1.15 START-UP PROCEDURES

A. Before start-up, each piece of equipment comprising a part of the system shall be checked for

proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, proper control sequence, and any other condition

which may cause damage to equipment or endanger personnel.

B. Insure that all control systems are fully operational in automatic mode. Individually test each

control loop to make certain it is operating as intended and is communicating properly with other

devices.





C. If systems are not to continue in use following the start-up procedures, steps should be taken to

insure against accidental operation or operation by unauthorized personnel. Provide padlocks on

disconnect switches where applicable.

D. Factory personnel shall be notified as appropriate to start systems requiring their services.

E. Notify engineer at least 2 weeks prior to the scheduled start-up date of all major mechanical

equipment and systems.

1.16 SCHEDULE OF TESTING

A. Provide testing in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract.

B. A schedule of testing shall be drawn up by the Division 23 Contractor in such a manner that it will

show areas tested, test pressure, length of test, date, time and signature of testing personnel.

C. All testing must be performed in the presence of the Architect's/Construction Manager's/General

Contractor's representative; his signature for verification of the test must appear on the schedule.

D. All testing must be performed in accord with the procedures set forth in Division 23 and other

Sections of the Specifications where referenced. At completion of testing, the completed schedule

shall then be submitted in triplicate to the Architect and a copy shall be forwarded to the 230593

Contractor for inclusion in Operation and Maintenance Manual.

E. Make all specified tests on piping, ductwork and related systems as specified in this specification.

F. Make sure operational and performance tests are made on seasonal equipment.

G. Complete all tests required by Code Authorities, such as smoke detection, life safety, fire

protection and health codes.

H. After test runs have been completed and systems have been demonstrated to be satisfactory and

ready for permanent operation, all permanent pipeline strainers and filters shall be cleaned, air

filters cleaned or replaced, settings on pressure relief valves properly adjusted, valve and pump

packings properly adjusted, belt tensions adjusted, drive guards secured in place, lubrication

checked and replenished if required.

1.17 CLEANING AND FINISHING

A. Provide cleaning in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1.

B. Cleaning shall include but not be limited to removing grease, dirt, dust, stains, labels, fingerprints

and other foreign materials from sight-exposed piping, ductwork, equipment, fixtures and other

such items installed under Division 23 of the work. If finishes have been damaged, refinish to

original condition and leave everything in proper working order and of intended appearance.

C. Section 232113 Contractor shall be responsible to certify that all HVAC Piping Systems have

been cleaned in accordance with Section 232500 - HVAC Water Treatment whether actually done

by the Section 232113 Contractor or by the 232500 Contractor.





1.18 WARRANTIES

A. Warranty: Provide a written warranty to the Owner covering the entire mechanical work to be free

from defective materials, equipment and workmanship for a period of one year after Date of

Acceptance. During this period provide labor and materials as required to repair or replace

defects. Provide certificates for such items of equipment which have warranties in excess of one

year. Submit to the Construction Manager/General Contractor for delivery to the Architect.

Include a copy of all warranties in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

B. This warranty will be superseded by the terms of any specific equipment warranties or warranty

modifications resulting from use of equipment for construction heat or ventilation.

C. All refrigeration compressors shall have a minimum (4) four year extended warranty from the

manufacturer of the equipment in addition to the standard one-year warranty.

1.19 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Project Observation Reports:

At or near the completion of the construction phase of this project, the Engineer will generate one

or more Project Observation Reports for the owner. These reports will list the items of

construction observed by the Engineer which are not in compliance with the Contract Documents.

The Mechanical Contractor and/or subcontractors shall certify completion of each listed item in

writing and forward copies to the Architect, Engineer and General Contractor. The Engineer will

not recommend the payment of retainage until this compliance certification has been received.

Each item on the Project Observation Report shall have a signature/date in the margin of the report

indicating completion of that item.

1.20 CERTIFICATES AND KEYS

A. Certificates: Upon completion of the work, deliver to the Construction Manager/General

Contractor one copy of Certificate of Final Inspection.

B. Keys: Upon completion of work, submit keys for mechanical equipment, panels, etc. to the

Construction Manager/General Contractor.

END OF SECTION

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 23 05 29 – 1




SECTION 23 05 29 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements apply

to this Section, and Contractor shall review and adhere to all requirements of these documents.

B. Work furnished but not installed by this Contractor:

1. Access doors in accordance with paragraph 2.3 in this Section 230529.

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The work includes, but is not limited to the following:

Materials and methods common to the work in general of Division 23 and other Divisions and

Sections of the Specifications where referenced.


A. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be performed by an ASME Certified welder with current

certificate in accordance with ANSI B31.1 for shop and project site welding of piping work.

Welder Qualifications:

1. Each welder shall have passed a qualification test within the past 6 months.

2. The test shall be in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section

IX, "Welding Qualifications", ASME Section VIII, and ANSI 313.

3. The test report shall certify that the welder is qualified to weld the material to be used at

the job site.

4. The Contractor shall submit three copies of each welder's qualification test report to the

Project Manager for approval prior to commencing the work. No welder shall be used on

the project until so certified.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Reference Standards: Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents,

comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following:

1. For electrical equipment and products, comply with applicable National Electrical

Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standards, and refer to NEMA Standards for

definitions of terminology herein.

2. Comply with National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA-70 for electrical installation

requirements.

3. Certified Pipe Welding Bureau (NCPWB) and American National Standards Institute

(ANSI) Code Numbers B31.2, & B31.9 as applicable for welding requirements.





4. Comply with American National Standards Institute (ANSI A13) for identification of

piping systems.

5. Comply with American National Standards Institute (ANSIB31.1) Code for Pressure

Piping.

6. State of Utah, Division of Facilities Construction and Management Design Criteria.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings and Product Data for the following items in accordance

with the General Conditions of the Contract:

1. Legend and color of piping and equipment identification.

2. Freeze Protection Systems for Piping and Equipment (Heat Tracing).

3. Proposed access door sizes and locations

B. Operating Instructions and Maintenance Data: Submit printed Operating Instructions and

Maintenance Data for the following items in accordance with Operating and Maintenance Data

Paragraph in Section 230500.

1. Motors.

2. Starters.

C. Certificates: Before proceeding with the Work, submit to the Architect/Construction

Manager/General Contractor, two copies of Certification that the welding work will be done

according to ANSI B31.1 by welders who have been tested and whose qualification test sheets are

available, attesting to their ability to weld in accordance with the Standard Procedure

Specifications as established by the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESS DOORS

A. Furnish steel access doors, minimum size required for normal service use or as sized on drawings

as manufactured by Inryco/Milcor, where shown on mechanical or architectural drawings, and

where required for access to valves, shock absorbers, dampers, mechanical equipment or

appurtenances.

B. Standard Doors:

1. Frames: 16 ga. steel.

2. Panels: 14 ga. steel.

3. Finish: Chemically bonded prime coat of baked enamel.

4. Hinge: Concealed spring hinges openable to 175 degree; removable pins. Provide

number of hinges as recommended by manufacturer for size of door.

5. Locking Devices: Flush steel, screwdriver operated, cam type locks. All access doors

below 8'-0" in public areas shall be key-operated cylinder lock with two keys. Same key

shall open all access doors.

6. Style of doors shall be appropriate for architectural finish at door location. Furnish

masonry anchors where required.





C. Fire Rated Doors:

1. Frames: 16 ga. steel.

2. Panels: Sandwich type, 20 ga. steel sheets, manufacturer's standard insulated core.

3. Finish: Chemically bonded prime coat of baked enamel.

4. Hinge: Continuous type, steel with stainless steel pin.

5. Closer: Automatic closing mechanism.

6. Locking Devices: Self-latching, key-operated cylinder lock with two keys; interior, latch

release mechanism.

7. Style of doors shall be appropriate for architectural finish at door location.

8. Fire rated doors shall have components and assemblies meeting requirements of the

American Insurance Association, Factory Mutual Insurance Association and listed by

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

D. Exact location of access doors shall be as directed by Mechanical Contractor and approved by the

Architect. Coordinate with General Contractor and Architect.

2.2 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES PROTECTION

A. General:

1. Provide hangers, rods, clamps, brackets, attachments, inserts, bracing, nuts, coach screws,

eye bolts, clips, plates, and washers as required for appropriate installation for building

structure provided.

2. All hangers and accessories shall be manufactured by one manufacturer for compatibility

of all components.

3. All hangers, attachments, and accessories shall be provided with a certified

manufacturer’s safety factor of five (5).

4. All hangers, attachments and accessories shall comply with the following:

a. Safety factor of 5 (actual load vs. ultimate load).

b. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) (except as amended by provisions

of this Specification for minimums) and as applicable.

c. Factory Mutual Engineering Division (FM) as applicable.

d. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS).

5. Support and positioning of piping shall be by means of engineered methods that comply

with IAPMO PS 42-96.

B. Material:

1. Hangers in contact with steel, iron, cast or ductile iron shall be hot dipped galvanized or

cold galvanized with "Galvilite by ZRC" cold galvanized compound only to a thickness

of not less than 3.0 mil (.003 inches). "Galvilite by ZRC Worldwide, Marshfield, MA.

Tel: (800) 831-3275, www.zrcworldwide.com” or equal.

2. Hangers in contact with copper piping shall be copper clad or provided with heavy

density felt (20 oz.) pad permanently attached to the hanger and placed so as to prevent

direct contact between pipe and hanger. Felt shall be mildew and moisture rot-proof.

http://www.zrcworldwide.com/





Heavy polyvinyl chloride coating on hanger, 5 mil thickness minimum will be acceptable

in lieu of felt.

3. Hangers in contact with "plastic" piping shall be galvanized in accordance with

Sub-paragraph B-1, above and padded in accordance with Sub-paragraph B-2, above.

4. Hangers for insulated piping shall be sized to accommodate the insulation. Provide with

insulation shields or insulation saddles as applicable and appropriate and in accordance

with the following schedule when high density non-collapsing inserts are not used

(Hanger spacing must be less than 10’):

Nominal Pipe or

Tubing Size

Shield

Length

Shield Gauge

Thickness

Material

½" thru 3" 12" 18 Galvanized

4" 12" 16 Galvanized



8" 24" -- B-line (B3160-3165)

over 8" 36" -- B-line (B3160-3165)

When high density non-collapsing inserts are required by section 230700, insulation

inserts between piping and shield shall be furnished by 230700 Contractor for appropriate

pipe size and insulation thickness for all insulated piping requiring a vapor barrier.

Hangers for insulated piping shall be sized to accommodate the insulation. Provide with

insulation shields or insulation saddles as applicable and appropriate and in accordance

with the following schedule when high density non-collapsing inserts are used (Hanger

spacing must be less than 10’):

Nominal Pipe or

Tubing Size

Insulation

Length

Shield

Length

Shield Gauge

Thickness

Material

½" thru 1-1/2" 6” 4" 22 Galvanized

2" to 5” 6” 4" 20 Galvanized

5" 9” 6" 16 Galvanized

6" 9” 6" 14 Galvanized

14” to 24” 12” 9" 12 Galvanized

When high density non-collapsing inserts are used in conjunction with the shorter shield

lengths shown in the table above, provide a means to prevent the shorter shield from

sliding off of the clevis hanger due to pipe movement.

5. Provide swivel ring hangers similar and equivalent to B-Line B-3170, 3170CT, and

3170C for pipe sizes 1/2" thru 8".

6. Clevis type hangers may, at the Contractors option, be provided when similar and

equivalent to B-Line B-3100, and 3100C.

PR-43,

04/26/17





7. Roller type hangers shall be used on all steam piping 4" and larger and when appropriate

shall be equivalent to B-Line B-3110 black steel with cast iron roller. Provide insulation

saddles for all roll-type hangers, B-Line B3160-3165. Calcium silicate inserts, in

conjunction with insulation saddles shall be provided on all steam piping.

8. Beam and bar joist clamps shall be appropriate for attachment locations, top beam,

bottom beam, etc., and provided with retainer rods, clips or straps as required.

9. Hanger spacing and minimum rod sizes shall be based on the applicable Mechanical and

Plumbing Codes for the type of piping installed.

10. Riser clamps shall be provided on all vertical risers at each floor and shall conform to

materials and protective coatings or pads as specified in Paragraph B of this Article 2.05.

Clamps shall be similar and equivalent to B-Line B-3131 and B-3148.

11. Provide concrete inserts where required in flat slab construction similar and equivalent to

B-Line B-22-1 Series 2000 lbs. per foot load capacity and spaced per hanger spacing

schedule (sub-paragraph B-9 above) provide all accessories and nuts required.

12. Trapeze hangers shall be constructed of channel similar and equivalent to B-Line Series

B-11 thru B-72 as appropriate complete with pipe clamps, nuts, rollers etc., as required.

Channel to bear 5 times actual weight of all piping on trapeze system with minimum

deflection. (.01 inch maximum). At a minimum, install pipe clamps on every other

trapeze hanger, and where required to comply with seismic restraint design.

13. Wall brackets shall be fabricated "knee" brackets conforming to requirements of

sub-paragraph B-12 above and made up with B-Line Series B-11 thru B-72 channel.

Angle clips may be used in wood joist construction when similar and equivalent to

B-Line B-3060 or 3061.

14. Hangers attached to wood construction shall be attached by use of eye bolts, coach

screws or lag bolts when load bearing ratings maintain a safety factory of 5.

15. All other means of support i.e., special construction, pipe stands, earthquake bracing,

sway bracing, etc., shall be provided as required and in conformance with jurisdictional

authority and these Contract Documents, submit all special or required support and

bracing systems for review by the Architect/Engineer prior to installing any item.

16. All vertical refrigeration suction and hot gas, and all steam piping shall be provided with

insulation shields and calcium silicate inserts at each support location.

17. All piping systems exposed to motorized traffic shall be fully protected by installation of

concrete-filled pipe bollards. Bollards shall be cleaned and painted as directed by the

Architect.

18. For plenum applications use pipe supports that meet ASTM E-84 25/50 standards.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Manufacturers acceptable to this Specification are as follows, all other manufacturers

must submit for acceptance.

a. B-Line

b. Fee & Mason

c. Grinnell

d. Hubbard Enterprises/HOLDRITE

e. P.H.D.

f. Michigan

g. Tolco

h. MAPA

i. Hilti





2.3 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials for identification shall be as follows:

1. Metal Tags: Round brass discs, minimum 1-1/2" diameter with edges ground smooth.

Each tag shall be punched and provided with brass chains for installation.

2. Engraved Nameplates: Fabricate from plastic sheet stock of sufficient thickness to allow

engraved lettering in contrasting color. Attach nameplates to equipment with screws.

3. Pressure Sensitive Markers: Brady Type 350 flexible vinyl film identification markers

and tape, with legend, size and color coding per ANSI A13.1. or approved equal.

2.4 FREEZE PROTECTION SYSTEMS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT (HEAT TRACING)

A. General:

1. Provide freeze protection for all water, sewer, sumps, tanks, pumps, equipment drains,

etc., where piping and equipment are subject to ambient temperatures of less than 35

deg.F, and as indicated on Contract Drawings.

2. Approved Manufacturers: Raychem, Thermon, Heat Trace Solutions.

3. Freeze protection shall consist of electrical self regulating semi-conductive "core" heat

cable complete with all accessories including but not limited to an adjustable thermostat

sensing the pipe or vessel contents temperature in lieu of ambient sensing, and contactors

to enable power to the heat cable when temperature is below thermostat setpoint.

4. The self-regulating heater shall consist of two (2) 16 AWG tinned-copper bus wires

embedded in parallel in a self-regulating polymer core that varies its power output to

respond to temperature all along its length, allowing the heater to be crossed over itself

without overheating, to be used directly on plastic pipe, and to be cut to length in the

field. The heater shall be covered by a radiation cross-linked modified polyolefin

dielectric jacket.

(Optional: For installation on plastic piping, the heater shall be applied using aluminum

tape (AT180). To provide a good ground path where none exists and to enhance the

heater's ruggedness, the heater shall have an outer braid of tinned-copper and an outer

jacket of modified polyolefin (-CR).

5. In order to provide energy conservation and to prevent overheating, the heater shall have

a self-regulating factor of at least 90 percent. The self-regulation factor is defined as the

percentage reduction, without thermostatic control, of the heater output going from 40°F

pipe temperature operation to 150°F pipe temperature operation.

6. The heater shall operate on line voltages of either 120 or 208-277 volts without the use of

transformers.

7. Heater shall operate from a circuit breaker for each tracing circuit.

8. The heat tracing shall maintain minimum "contents" temperature of 40 deg.F at ambient

temperature of -20 deg.F when enclosed within a minimum of 1" fiberglass insulation on

piping and vessels and pumps, no insulation required on sumps, etc., unless otherwise

indicated.

9. Installation:

a. Apply the heater linearly on the pipe after piping has been successfully pressure

tested. Secure the heater to piping with cable ties or fiberglass tape.





b. Apply "electric traced" signs to the outside of the thermal insulation.

10. Tests:

After installation and before and after installing the thermal insulation, subject to testing

using a 2500 VDC megger. Minimum insulation resistance should be 20 to 1000

megaohms regardless of length.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Manufacturer: Raychem Raychem Raychem

2. Product: Chemelex Chemelex Chemelex

3. Trade Name: XL-Trace XL-Trace XL-Trace

4. Pipe Size: ½”-3” ½” - 3” 4” & Larger

5. Product No.: 5XL-1 5XL-2 8XL-2-CR

6. Voltage: 120V 277V 277V

7. Max Circuit Length: 270 Ft. 470 Ft. 350 Ft.

8. Thermal Rating: 5 Watts/Ft. 5 Watts/Ft. 8 Watts/Ft.

9. Connection: RAYCLIC-PL RAYCLIC-PL RAYCLIC-PL

10. Splice Kit & Tee Kit: RAYCLIC-T RAYCLIC-T RAYCLIC-T

11. End Seal Kit: RAYCLIC-S RAYCLIC-S RAYCLIC-S

12. Thermostat: RAYCLIC-E RAYCLIC-E RAYCLIC-E

13. Glass Cloth Adhesive Tape: GT-66 GT-66 GT-66

C. Responsibilities:

1. Heat trace including all accessories shall be furnished as part of the Work included in

Division 23. Installation of cable on pipe including splices, strapping and bulb placement

shall be by Division 23 Contractor.

2. Installation of power wiring including breakers and mounting thermostat enclosure shall

be part of the Work included in Division 26.

3. Work under Division 23 includes coordination of material quantity and delivery, tracing

installation, and insulation of piping after heat trace has been installed, inspected and

tested.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. General: Unless otherwise specifically indicated on Drawings or in Specifications, install

equipment and materials in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer, including

performance of tests as manufacturer recommends.

B. Protection:

1. Close ends of pipe and ductwork during construction and cover equipment to prevent

entry of foreign material. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical

damage before, during and after installation. Cover floor drains and protect fixtures and

equipment against damage during concrete pours and mechanical work.





C. Quiet Operation and Vibration:

1. All work shall operate in accordance with Section 230540 - Mechanical Sound and

Vibration Control under all conditions of load.

2. Sound or vibration conditions not in accordance with Section 230540 and considered

objectionable shall be corrected in a manner approved by the Architect under the Work of

Division 23.

3.2 ELECTRIC WIRING

A. Furnish equipment requiring electrical connections to operate properly and to deliver full capacity

at electrical service available.

C. All control wiring to be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; all wiring shall be

color coded to facilitate checking.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, all mechanical equipment motors, starters, and controls shall be

furnished, set in place, and wired in accordance with the Electrical Equipment/Wiring

Responsibility Matrix on the drawings. Contractor should note that the intent of this electric

wiring matrix is to have the Division 23 Contractor responsible for coordinating all control wiring

as outlined, whether or not specifically called for by the mechanical or electrical drawings and

specifications. Mechanical Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Division

26 for electrical work of this Division 23 which is not otherwise specified. No extras will be

allowed for Contractor's failure to provide for these required items. The Division 23 Contractor

shall also refer to the Division 26 specifications and plans for all power and control wiring and

shall advise the Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies prior to bidding.

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT/WIRING RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX

Item Furnished

By*

Set By* Power Wiring* Control

Wiring*

Fused & Unfused Disconnect Switches,

Thermal Overload & Heaters

EC EC EC --

Manual Switches & Speed Control

Switches carrying full load currents.

MC EC EC EC

Control Relays & Transformer (See Note

2)

MC MC EC MC

Thermostats (Line Voltage) MC EC EC EC

Temperature Control Panels MC MC EC MC

Exhaust fans when switched with room

lights.

MC MC EC EC

Fire sprinkler system alarms, tamper

switches, flow switches and fire alarm

systems tie-ins to provide a complete fire

protection system.

FPC FPC FPC FPC

Freeze Protection Heat Cable MC MC EC MC

* MC = Mechanical Contractor under Division 23 of the work.

* FM = Mechanical Contractor under Section 212200 - FM-200 Fire Suppression System.





* FPC = Fire Protection Contractor.

* EC = Electrical Contractor under Division 26 of the work.

* MGES = Medical Gas Equipment Supplier (Section 226313).

D. All temperature control conduit and wiring shall be furnished and installed under Section 230900.

All motorized damper and motorized valve wiring shall be furnished and installed under Section

230900.

3.3 SLEEVES, PLATES AND CLOSURES

A. Division 23 Contractor shall provide and locate pipe sleeves, and inserts required before new

floors and walls are built or shall be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required

where sleeves and inserts were not installed or where incorrectly located.

B. Provide sleeves for mechanical piping passing through concrete floor slabs and through concrete,

masonry, tile, and gypsum wall construction. Provide metal collars to close and protect openings.

C. Where sleeves are placed in exterior walls below grade, pack spaces between the pipe or conduit

and the sleeves with Hornflex Thiokol L-32 Sealant or Link Seal and make water-tight. Provide

metal rodent collars securely fastened to structure. Link seal shall not be used on fire lines.

D. Where pipe motion due to expansion and contraction will occur, make sleeves of sufficient

diameter to permit free movement of pipe. Where sleeves pass insulated pipes, the sleeves shall

be large enough to pass the pipe only and the insulation shall be made to butt against the

construction, except for pipes requiring insulation having a vapor barrier, in which case, the

sleeves shall be large enough to pass the pipe and insulation. Check floor and wall construction

finishes to determine proper length of sleeves for various locations, make actual lengths to suit the

following:

1. Terminate sleeves flush with floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings.

2. Seal annular space around pipes watertight at floor penetrations.

3. In areas where pipes are concealed, as in chases, terminate sleeves flush with floor.

4. In all areas where pipes are exposed, extend sleeves 1/4" above finished floor, except in

rooms having floor drains, where sleeves shall be extended 2" above floor and in

Kitchens and Mechanical Equipment Rooms, where sleeves shall be extended 4" above

floor.

D. Sleeves shall be constructed of 24 gauge galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints for all

sleeves set in concrete floor slabs terminating flush with the floor. All other sleeves shall be

constructed of galvanized steel pipe unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. "Crete Sleeve"

(plastic type) sleeves are acceptable for concrete construction as manufactured by Sperzel

Division, Shamrock Industries or Willoughby Industries.

E. Fasten sleeves securely in floors and walls so that they will not become displaced when concrete is

placed or when other construction is built around them.

F. Provide tight fitting floor and ceiling plates on pipes passing thru walls, ceilings, and floors.

Nickel or chrome plated in finished areas, galvanized cast iron in unfinished areas. Provide wall

and ceiling flanges for ducts in finished areas.





G. Provide all cutting, patching of holes, openings, notches. Obtain written approval for notching,

boring, chipping, burning, drilling, welding to structural members in accordance with the General

Conditions of the Contract and paragraph 3.7 of this Section.

H. Where pipe sleeves penetrate fire rated walls and floors, this contractor shall use fire safing to seal

openings.

3.4 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING

A. Excavate for all mechanical equipment such as tanks, ductwork, sump pumps, manholes and

trenches for underground pipelines to required depths. Compact bottoms of excavations. Slope to

obtain required grade. Remove rocks, trash and debris before installation of equipment and

backfilling. Backfill by hand tamping earth under the haunch of the pipe to specified compaction.

Backfill and compact in thin layers until top of pipe is covered. Complete backfill by methods

required or directed for soil characteristics to comply with the Architectural section of these

specifications.

B. Excavations near footings shall be such that, when nearing building footings, or bearing

foundation walls, the excavation bottom shall not be nearer the footing than a normal 45 degree

bearing line from edge of footing bottom to bottom of excavation. When it is necessary to

perpendicularly cross under a continuous foundation wall, care shall be taken to insure that

crossing is clear of the structural foundation and of minimal width.

C. Do not place backfill over pipe lines until lines are properly tested.

D. When trenching through specially tested areas, such as paving, asphalt, etc., Contractor shall be

responsible for restoring the surface to its original condition, and in a manner approved by the

Architect. Repair trenches where settlement occurs, and restore the surface for the period of one

year after final acceptance of the project. All cutting of paving, asphalt, etc. shall be by saw

cutting.

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Openings in New Construction:

1. Provisions for New Openings: The Division 23 Contractor shall verify all openings

required in the new construction in connection with the work under Division 23 with the

Architectural and Structural Drawings and shall then meet with and verify same with the

General Contractor/Construction Manager who will assign the work to the appropriate

contractor to provide all openings in the new construction of the correct size and location

in walls, floors or through roofs required for the installation of the mechanical work.

B. Cutting in New Construction:

1. Failure on the part of the Division 23 Contractor to make the above arrangements for

required openings shall cause the cost of cutting and patching for the necessary openings

for the installation of his work to be borne by him, either by being assigned to the

General Contractor/Construction Manager or in the form of performing the required

cutting himself. In either case, all patching shall be done by the appropriate finishing





contractor as determined by the General Contractor/Construction Manager. No cutting or

drilling of holes shall be done without approval of the Architect/Engineer.

C. Patching in New Construction:

1. The appropriate finishing contractor as determined by the General

Contractor/Construction Manager shall patch all openings in the new structure. All

openings made in fire rated walls, floors, or ceilings, shall be patched and made tight to

conform to the fire rating for the enclosure. All materials used in patching shall match the

materials specified in the Architectural Specifications and all patched areas shall be

restored to the specified finish surface to the satisfaction of the Architect.

2. The Division 23 Contractor shall pay the appropriate Finishing Contractor as determined

by the General Contractor/Construction Manager for all patching resulting from cutting

to accommodate mechanical work.

3.6 PIPE HANGERS/SUPPORTS

A. Use inserts, anchors, expansion bolts or other approved and acceptable means of attachment to

concrete construction. Set inserts in advance of concrete installation, provide required

reinforcement rod for all inserts carrying loading equivalent of one 4" pipe or more. All inserts

shall be flush with face of slab or wall containing insert.

B. Provide flat square washers for rods thru metal decking with nut above washer, when acceptable

and approved.

C. Cinch hangers to carry appropriate share of loading and slope piping without sags or "pocketing"

as appropriate and required.

D. Rod offsets, or angle installation, plumber tape or wire will not be accepted. Hanger rods shall be

true and plumb.

E. Piping shall not be hung from other piping or equipment items. Provide attachments to building

structure only. Use trapeze, wall brackets, knee brackets, etc., where hanger rods cannot be

attached within spacing plumb to structures.

F. Provide sway and earthquake bracing where required in accordance with Section 230548 -

Mechanical Seismic Control.

3.7 PAINTING

A. Surfaces of exposed equipment and materials to be thoroughly cleaned and left ready for painting

in accordance with Architectural Painting Specifications.

B. Duct interiors visible through registers, grilles and diffusers shall be painted flat black.

C. Exposed gas piping to be cleaned, primed and two coats of paint (grey).

D. All other painting of mechanical equipment and piping, unless otherwise noted, shall be performed

under other divisions of the work with the exception of identification of piping and equipment

which will be the responsibility of the Division 23 Contractor.





3.8 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide pipe identification, valve tags, stencils, or engraved nameplates to clearly

identify the mechanical equipment, piping and controls of the various mechanical systems and

direction of flow in piping. Valve tags not required on isolation valves for terminal equipment

such as VAV’s, unit heaters, etc.

B. Methods for identification shall be as follows:

1. Metal Tags: Stamp tags with letter prefixes to indicate service, followed by a number for

location in system.

2. Engraved Nameplates: Attach nameplates with brass screws. Pressure-sensitive

embossed labels are not acceptable. Nameplates shall bear the same identifying legend

used on the Contract Documents.

3. Painted Stencils: Stenciled markings shall be neatly performed with no overspray, drips,

or other imperfections. Pipes and equipment to be stenciled shall first be wiped clean of

dirt, dust, rust, grease and moisture. Pipes and smooth, hard surface in the area the

stencil is to be applied. Paint application shall comply with Architectural Painting

Specifications.

Size of Legend and Letters for Stencils:

Insulation or Pipe

Diameter

Length of Color

Field

Size of Letters

¾" to 1-1/4" 8" 1/2"

1-1/2" to 2" 8" 3/4"

2-1/2" to 6" 12" 1-1/4"

8" to 10" 24" 2-1/2"

over 10" 32" 3-1/2"

Ductwork and

Equipment

NA 2-1/2"

4. Piping Legend and Color (Contractor shall obtain written approval of colors from

Owner's representative prior to starting work.)

5. Pressure Sensitive Markers: Apply pressure sensitive markers in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations with complete wrap around may be used at Contractor’s

option. Marker adhesion will be tested for permanence. Any markers showing dog ears,

bubbles, or other failings shall be replaced.

6. Semi-Rigid Plastic Identification Markers: Seton Setmark premolded (not pressure

sensitive) identification markers may be used at Contractor's option on service piping

which is accessible for maintenance operations (but not on piping in finished spaces).

This type marker shall not be installed on bare pipe when surface temperature exceeds

180 deg.F unless a 1" thick insulation band is first provided under marker for protection

from the hot pipe.

C. Identification of Piping: Identify all piping accessible for maintenance in crawl spaces, tunnels,

above ceilings, and access spaces as well as exposed to view utilizing pressure sensitive markers,

according to the following procedures:





1. Use an arrow marker for each pipe-content legend. The arrow shall always point away

from the pipe legend and in the direction of flow: color and height of arrow to be same

as content legend lettering.

2. If flow can be in both directions, use a double-headed arrow indication.

3. Apply pipe legend and arrow indication at every point of pipe entry or exit where line

goes thru wall or ceiling cut.

4. Apply pipe legend and arrow indication within 3" of each valve to show proper

identification of pipe contents and direction of flow.

5. The legend shall be applied to the pipe so that lettering is in the most legible position.

For overhead piping, apply legend on the lower half of the pipe where view is

unobstructed, so that legend can be read at a glance from floor level.

6. For pipes under 3/4" O.D., fasten brass tags securely at specified legend locations.

7. Insulated piping equipped with electric heat trace shall additionally be labeled “Electric

Traced” with label of same size and color as the pipe legend.

D. Valves: All valves, including but not limited to domestic hot and cold water, hot water

recirculation, heating water, chilled water, condenser water, fire protection, gas, and special

service valves located inside the building, shall be tagged and identified as to type of service,

location number, and normal valve position (normally open or normally closed).

E. Controls: All magnetic starters and relays, shall have nameplates or be stenciled to identify

connecting or controlled equipment. All manual operating switches, fused disconnect switches and

thermal over-load switches which have not been specified as furnished with indexed faceplates

shall also have nameplates or be stenciled as to "connected" or "controlled" equipment. All

automatic controls, control panels, zone valves, pressure electric, electric pressure switches,

relays, and starters shall be clearly identified.

F. Pumps: All pumps shall be identified as to service and zones served. Base mounted pumps shall

be stenciled or have system served nameplates. Brass tags secured by brass chains may be used on

small in-line pumps.

G. Storage Tanks, Water Treatment Equipment and Heaters: All tanks and heaters shall have

nameplate as to service. The connecting pipes to each shall be identified and the service

temperature entering and leaving the tank or heater shall be indicated.

H. Fans: All supply and exhaust fans and air handling units and connecting ductwork supplying one

or more areas from an equipment room or isolated crawl or furred space shall have nameplate as to

plan code number, service and areas of zones served.

I. Air Conditioning Equipment: Air conditioning and evaporative cooling equipment such as

chillers, pumps, condensers, or roof-top equipment shall be identified by system nameplates.

J. Access Doors: Provide engraved nameplates or painted stencils to identify concealed valves,

controls, dampers or other similar concealed mechanical equipment. Obtain Architect approval

before installation on all access doors in finished areas.

K. Lift Out Ceilings: Provide engraved nameplates or black lettering on transparent adhesive labels

on ceiling tee stem to identify concealed valves, controls dampers or similar concealed mechanical

equipment which is directly above nameplate in ceiling space. Obtain Architect approval before

installation.

L. Expansion tanks shall be labeled to indicate system served and precharge pressure.





M. Access Flooring: Provide thin engraved nameplate on access panel to indicate location of

underfloor fan coils and smoke/fire dampers.

3.9 DRIP PANS

A. Provide drip pans under all fluid conducting piping which runs over servers, telecom equipment,

electric switchgear, busway, or electric motor starters, and under all point-of-use water heaters.

B. Pans: 18 gauge galvanized iron. Pans shall be two inch deep, with rolled top edges, and shall

extend six inches each side of the pipe or group of pipes and six inches beyond the equipment

below. Keep pans as close to the underside of the pipes as practicable. All seams shall be soldered,

and pans shall be crossbraced as required to prevent sagging and warping.

C. Pitch each pan to a drain connection, and pipe a 1-1/2 inch or larger copper tube drain to discharge

over nearest available open drain.

D. Provide a drip pan under all coils that may have condensate during operation. Pipe drain to nearest

drain.

3.10 FIRE SAFING

A. Mechanical Contractor shall provide fire safing for his work as follows: Where fire rated

separations are penetrated by pipes, conduit or ductwork, the annular space around the pipe,

conduit or ductwork shall be filled with a U.L. Rated fire safing material. Refer to Division 7 for

materials and application specifications.

3.11 FREEZE PROTECTION CABLE

A. Comply with National Electric Code Section 427 for installation.

B. Protect heater strips from damage before, during and after installation.

C. Provide waterproof insulation for all heat traced and heat maintained piping one inch thick

minimum in accordance with Section 230700.

D. When installing do not twist buss wires together.

E. Test each circuit prior to and immediately after installation of thermal insulation using a megger

under 500 volts D.C. Minimum insulation resistance reading shall be ten (10) megohms

regardless of length, if less than ten (10) megohms investigate cause and replace damaged sections

- do not repair!

F. Install heat cable on lower quadrant of pipe 45 degrees up from vertical, provide ties or fiberglass

tape 12" on center max.

G. Install all accessories and kits per manufacturers' recommendations and standards. Careful

attention to manufacturers’ installation instructions as pertains to valves and equipment will be

strictly adhered to and enforced.





3.12 DRAIN LINES

A. Provide condensate drain lines from each cooling coil and evaporative media sump drain pan to

nearest drain or to termination indicated.

B. Do not route condensate lines above electrical panels, switch gear, transformers, motor starters,

elevator equipment, servers, or telecom equipment. Should there be a conflict with the plans and

this paragraph, notify the Engineer immediately for corrective instruction prior to starting work.

C. When any air-handling equipment is used for temporary heat, the filters (MERV 13) shall be

installed and maintained. Before building acceptance by Owner, these units shall be thoroughly

cleaned and new filters shall be installed. This is over and above the extra set of filters to be

provided the Owner as called for in the specifications. Coils shall be cleaned if necessary, as

determined by the Engineer. Tape around perimeter edge to seal to grille.

D. Any and all systems being used for temporary heat shall become the Contractor's responsibility to

maintain, and be put into first class working order before acceptance by the Owner.

E. Any manufacturer's guarantees that start with the use of equipment for temporary heat shall be

extended by the contracting firm holding the prime contract for construction, so that the Owner

will have his one-year guarantee from date of acceptance.

END OF SECTION

650 Main SLC GMP - 2020-04-13 Salt Lake City, Utah HOK Project No. 19.10030.00

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 – 1

SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK

A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements apply to this Section, and Contractor shall review and adhere to all requirements of these Documents.

B. Related work specified in other Sections:

Section 230500 - Basic Mechanical Requirements Section 233300 – Ductwork and Accessories


A. The work includes, but is not limited to the following:

1. Upon completion of the installation of all the plumbing, air and heating or cooling water systems, glycol systems, all necessary adjustments shall be made to provide capacities listed on the Drawings to properly balance these systems.

2. Submittals and written reports as specified. 3. Testing requirements as described in Specification Section 230500, paragraph

1.16. 4. Witness duct leakage test required by Specification Section 233300 – Ductwork

and Accessories. 5. Provide assistance, in cooperation with the various trades, in the final

adjustments and test of the Life Safety Systems to comply with the requirements of the Building and Fire Departments.

6. Provide Owner training as described in Specification Section 230500. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Work under this section shall be executed under the direct supervision of a Registered Professional Engineer having an established professional office in the State of Utah and having an experience record of not less than five (5) years in the mechanical contracting industry, engaged in testing, balancing and adjusting of air and hydronic mechanical systems for not less than two (2) years of that time, or, under the direct supervision of a qualified testing, adjusting and balancing supervisor, possessing certification from the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) or from the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC).

B. Comply with the applicable procedures in the chapter on Testing, Adjusting and

Balancing in the latest ASHRAE Edition of the NEBB, AABC, and SMACNA Test and Balance documents.

C. Calibration and maintenance of instruments shall be in accordance with manufacturer's

standards and recommendations, and calibration histories for each instrument shall be available for examination.



D. Accuracy of measurements shall be in accordance with the applicable measurement means as listed in the latest edition of NEBB, AABC, and SMACNA Test and Balance documents.

E. Allowable Tolerances:

1. Tolerances of adjustment for air handling systems are plus or minus 10% for

supply, return, and exhaust systems at air devices and plus 10%/minus 0% at all fans/source equipment from figures shown on drawings.

2. Tolerances of adjustment for hydronic systems, are plus or minus 10% of design conditions shown on drawings at terminal devices and equipment, and plus 10%/minus 0% at all pumps.

F. Final Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of all hydronic and air systems shall be performed

by an approved separate professional Testing, Adjusting and Balancing subcontractor meeting the above Quality Assurance requirements. Acceptable separate professional subcontractors approved to work on this project are as follows: 1. BTC Services, Inc. 2. Certified Testing & Balancing, Inc. 3. RS Analysis, Inc. 4. Bonneville Test & Balance 5. Intermountain Test & Balance

G. Subcontractors not listed above must submit for acceptance.

H. Within 30 days after execution of the Owner-Contractor Agreement, transmit to

Architect/Engineer the name and qualifications of the organization proposed to perform the services.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Procedure: Submit Qualifications, Documentation, Test Schedules and Reports in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract.

B. Qualifications:

1. Submit three copies of documentation to confirm compliance with Quality

Assurance provisions:

a. Organization supervisor and personnel training and qualifications. b. Specimen copy of each of the report forms proposed for use.

C. Preliminary Report: At least fifteen days prior to starting field work, submit three copies

of:

1. A set of report forms filled out as to the design flow values and the installed equipment pressure drops, and the required CFM for air terminals.

2. A complete list of instruments proposed to be used, organized in appropriate

categories, with data-sheets for each. Show:

a. Manufacturer and model number. b. Description and use when needed to further identify the instrument. c. Size of capacity range.



d. Latest calibration date.

3. Architect/Engineer will review submittals for compliance with Contract Documents, and will return one set marked to indicate:

a. Discrepancies noted between measured data and Contract Documents. b. Additional, or more accurate, instruments required. c. Requests for re-calibration of specific instruments.

D. Schedules:

1. Schedule tests to comply with project completion schedules. 2. Schedule testing and balancing of parts of the systems which are delayed due to

seasonal, climatic, occupancy, or other conditions beyond control of the Contractor, as early as the proper conditions will allow, after consultation with Architect/Engineer.

3. Submit reports of delayed testing promptly after execution of those services.

E. Final Report: At least fifteen days prior to Contractor's request for final inspection, submit three copies of final reports, on applicable reporting forms, for review. Submit a fourth copy directly to the Engineer. Each individual final reporting form must bear the signature of the person who recorded data and that of the NEBB or AABC certified supervisor of the reporting organization. Identify instruments of all types which were used and last date of calibration of each. Report shall include:

1. A detailed letter to Engineer outlining all abnormal or notable conditions not

covered in above data specifically identifying all locations where specified flow tolerances could not be met.

2. A set of reduced black and white or blueline prints with all air openings clearly marked to correspond with data sheets and with thermometer locations clearly marked.

3. Data sheets showing amount of air handled at each opening, instrument used, velocity readings, and manufacturer free area factor.

4. Data sheets giving log of room temperatures in rooms exhibiting objectionable temperatures during the heating season. Logs shall be taken when outside temperature is 30 deg.F or colder.

5. Data sheets giving log of room temperatures in rooms exhibiting objectionable temperatures during the cooling season. Logs shall be taken with full occupant load, full lighting, and maximum solar conditions.

6. Equipment data sheets giving make, size and model, of fans, starters and motors with rated amps and service factors, and drives. Include pumps, supply fans, exhaust and recirculating fans.

7. Operating data including fan RPM, inlet and outlet pressures, pressure drop across filters, face and bypass dampers, and measured motor current and voltage, BHP and CFM (total).

8. Heating equipment operating data including air temperatures entering and leaving heating coils (maximum air temperature rise), together with corresponding air flow and air pressure drop, water temperature entering and leaving heating coil, water flow and pressure drop through heating coil.

9. Cooling equipment operating data including air temperatures entering and leaving cooling coils together with corresponding air flow and air pressure drop, water temperature entering and leaving cooling coil, and water flow and pressure drop through cooling coil.

10. Cooling tower operating data including measurements of hot water, cold water and wet-bulb temperatures, circulating water flow rate, fan RPM, fan power and wind velocity.



11. Equipment and operating data as required to show performance of pumps, heat exchangers, domestic hot water circulating systems, heating, ventilating, and air conditioning units, cabinet heaters, unit heaters, unit ventilators, fans and temperature control devices.

12. Sound pressure levels showing readings in all 8 octave bands and plotted on RC(II) charts shall be submitted for the following:

a. All sides of Mechanical Rooms. b. Lobbies, Labs, and Commercial Area. c. Conference Rooms. d. Spaces within 20 ft. of parking garage ventilation fan inlets and outlets. e. All spaces exhibiting abnormally high or annoying noise levels.

13. Domestic hot water recirculation data including flow at each branch shown requiring specific flow, and at the pump.


A. The following job conditions must be verified before any testing, adjusting or balancing of the environmental systems begin:

1. Installation of the designated system is complete and in full operation. 2. On hydronic systems, strainers shall be cleaned, temperature control valve

operation shall be checked, pump rotation shall be checked, pressure reducing valves shall be adjusted, and other such conditions requiring correction.

3. Air systems shall be checked for dirty filters, filter leakage, equipment vibrations, damper operation, fan rotation, and other such conditions requiring correction.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROCEDURE

A. Confirm that project conditions have been verified and that necessary corrections have been made before proceeding with the Work.

B. The Test and Balance Contractor must proportion air/water flows in the system while

introducing a minimum amount of resistance. All systems are to be proportionally balanced.

C. Hydronic Systems:

1. Using system flow meters and/or contact pyrometer, the balancing firm shall

adjust the quantity of water or glycol solution handled by each pump and supplied to each coil, solar collector, heat exchanger, cooling tower, and such other primary source equipment to meet design requirements, and mark each balancing cock at final setting.



D. Air Systems:

1. The balancing firm shall adjust all dampers, diffusers, registers, belts and

sheaves for the delivery and distribution of air quantities shown in the Contract Documents and shall mark each balancing device at final setting.

2. Adjust fan speeds and motor drives within drive limitations for required air volume, provide new sheaves as necessary, or adjustable bands on constant volume plenum fans, and notify Division 26 Contractor of any thermal overloads that need to be changed/replaced.

3. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including individual filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 0.5” w.c., equivalent to 50% loading of filters.

4. Exhaust and recirculation air systems shall be adjusted for air quantities shown on Drawings.

5. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions.

6. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage.

7. Measure building static pressure in both economizer mode and minimum outside air mode, and adjust supply, return and exhaust air systems to provide the required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches water column positive static pressure at the Building Entries.

8. Distribution system shall be adjusted to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise.

9. Where multiple air diffusers are shown on one terminal box, adjust dampers for the delivery and distribution of air quantities shown in the Contract Documents.

10. Variable Air Volume System Powered Terminal Units: Set each volume controller to CFM setting shown on drawings, confirm that each unit has all control air connections properly made and confirm proper operation for automatic variable air volume temperature control.

11. Set all VAV boxes at minimum/maximum air flow shown on drawings. 12. Adjust air flow switches for proper operation on all fan powered VAV boxes. 13. Test Run: In order to determine that the system installation is complete and will

operate satisfactorily, make a test run with equipment operating per normal temperature control schedule and sequence for a period of seven days for each heating and cooling season. Contractor shall notify Architect in writing when he is ready to begin test. Provide personnel to run test and operate and adjust equipment as may be required during test run. Keep a log for each day indicating all malfunctions that occurred and corrections and adjustments made. Be responsible for operation of equipment during this test.

14. T & B is to run all air handlers to simulate dirty filter conditions 15. Report: After all adjustments are made, a detailed report shall be prepared by

the balancing firm and submitted to the Architect for approval. Owner reserves the right to spot check the report prior to final acceptance.

E. Plumbing System

1. Hot Water Recirculation Systems: Set flow at each balancing valve shown.

Record flow at each pump. Verify the proper installation of automatic flow control valves.

END OF SECTION

MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 07 00 – 1




SECTION 23 07 00 - MECHANICAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK

A. Requirements: Provide insulation in accordance with the Contract Documents.


Section 224450 - Plumbing Equipment

Section 230500 - Basic Mechanical Requirements

Section 230529 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods

Section 230540 - Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control

Section 232113 - HVAC Piping & Specialties

Section 233100 - Air Distribution

Section 235200 - Boilers

Section 235700 - Heat Transfer

Section 236400 - Refrigeration


A. The mechanical insulation work required by this Section shall include materials and methods as

described herein and on the Drawings and as required by applicable energy codes.

B. The work includes, but is not limited to providing insulation on the following:

1. Air Distribution Systems:

Exterior surfaces of all plenums and ducts which are a part of the following systems

where duct or plenum is not lined (see Section 230540):

Outside Air

Mixed Air

Medium Pressure Supply Air

Low Pressure Supply Air

Return Air

Rigid Round Runouts to Diffusers

2. Other Systems:

Cold Condensate Drains

Piping Exposed to Freezing with Heat Trace where noted on Drawings.


A. Qualifications: The firm executing the work of this Section shall have at least 3 years successful

installation experience on projects with mechanical insulations similar in scope and nature to that

required for this Project.





B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: All insulation shall be in accordance with Jurisdicational

Building Code and State and Federal Energy Conservation Standards.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of

mechanical insulation in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract. Include

schedule showing manufacturer's product number, thickness and furnished accessories for each

mechanical system requiring insulation.

B. Provide schedule of pipe sizes with insulation thickness at corresponding fluid temperatures.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery of Materials: Deliver insulation, coverings, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers

with manufacturer's stamp or label affixed showing fire hazard ratings of products.

B. Storage of Materials: Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage. Do

not install damaged insulation; remove from project site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable manufacturers of insulation materials shall be as follows:

3M/Thermal Ceramics (FireMaster)

Armstrong

Certain-teed

Dow Chemical

Gilsulate International, Inc. (Gilsulate 500XR Loose-Fill Insulation)

Johns Manville

Knauf

Manson Insulation Products

Owens-Corning

Renler (Pyroscat FastR Wrap)

SpecSeal (Claymac)

Unifrax (Fyrewrap)

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Conductivity:





TYPE OF INSULATION MAXIMUM THERMAL

CONDUCTIVITY/INCH

Calcium Silicate 0.47 at 600 degrees Fahrenheit

Glass Fiber Pipe Insulation 0.25 at 75 degrees Fahrenheit

Glass Fiber Rigid Equipment Insulation 0.25 at 75 degrees Fahrenheit

Glass Fiber Rigid Duct Insulation 0.24 at 75 degrees Fahrenheit

Glass Fiber Blanket Duct Insulation 0.29 at 75 degrees Fahrenheit

Expanded Polystyrene 0.24 at 75 degrees Fahrenheit

Ceramic Fiber Grease Duct Wrap 0.25 at 70 degrees Fahrenheit

Polyisocyanurate Foam 0.19 at 75 degrees Fahrenheit

Granular Loose Fill See below

B. Duct Board: Rigid glass fiber board with a minimum density of 1-1/2 pounds per cubic foot, a

maximum thermal conductivity of 0.24 at 75 deg.F and complying with National Fire Protection

Association Pamphlet 90A.

C. Duct Wrap: Blanket-type fiberglass insulation 1-1/2" thick, 0.75 pounds per cubic foot density.

D. Vapor Barrier Coatings: To have a perm rating not more than 0.25 when tested in accordance with

ASTM E96, procedure A.

E. Adhesives, Sealers, Facings and Vapor Barrier Coatings: To be compatible with materials to

which applied, and shall not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack the pipe or insulation materials in

either the wet or dry state. Use only adhesives, sealers, facings, and vapor barrier coatings as

recommended by the manufacturer of insulation materials.

F. Chemicals for Treating Paper: Non-soluble.

G. Non-Collapsing Inserts: Calcium Silicate or Polyisocyanurate (Dow Trymer 2000). No

Polystyrene inserts are allowed.

H. Granular, Loose-Fill Insulation: Inorganic, nontoxic, nonflammable, sodium potassium aluminum

silicate with calcium carbonate filler. Include chemical treatment that renders insulation

hydrophobic.

1. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.60 at 175 deg F and 0.65 at 300 deg F.

2. Application Temperature Range: 35 to 800 deg F.

3. Dry Density: 40 to 42 lb/cu. ft.

4. Strength: 12,000 lb/sq. ft.

2.3 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. Insulation and accessory materials to meet the following criteria:

1. Insulation Materials: To be noncombustible as defined in National Fire Protection

Association Pamphlet 220 and to be Underwriter’s Laboratory listed.

2. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets,

coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and





smoke-developed rating of 50 or less, as tested by ANSI/ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255)

method.

2.4 HANDICAP LAVATORY INSULATION

A. Insulation System: Molded closed cell insulation, 3/16-inch nominal wall thickness; provide pre-

molded fittings to completely cover tail piece, P-trap, trap arm, hot and cold water supply stop

valves and exposed supply tubing; include nylon fasteners for all fittings.

B. Handi Lav-Guard manufactured by Truebro; Trap Wrap manufactured by Brocar Products; Zeston

Snap-Trap manufactured by Johns Manville or approved equal.

C. Install at all handicap accessible lavatories installed in this project.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Testing of piping and ductwork to be completed prior to application of insulation.

B. Apply insulation tightly over clean, dry surfaces with sections or edges firmly butted together.

C. Make insulation continuous through sleeves or openings in walls and floors.

D. Run sealed vapor barriers continuous throughout all cold surface insulation systems.

E. Avoid the use of staples on vapor barrier jackets. Seal all vapor barrier penetrations with white

vapor barrier sealant.

F. Apply adhesives so as not to exceed the coverages recommended by the manufacturers.

G. Leave surfaces clean and ready for painting.

H. Do not insulate cleanouts, access openings or identification plates. Neatly bevel insulation and

finishes up to the edges of such openings and stop with sheet metal rings.

I. Provide non-collapsing inserts between pipe and all shields/saddles on all insulated piping 2" and

larger.

3.2 SPECIFIC INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

1. Factory installed piping within HVAC equipment tested and rated in accordance with

20012IECC referenced procedures.

2. Strainers, control valves, and balancing alves associated with piping 1-inch or less in

diameter on heating water systems.

DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION

Location Min. Insulation Value

In unconditioned spaces (i.e. ceiling R-6





spaces or unheated spaces)

Outside building envelope R-8

Exceptions:

a. When located within equipment.

b. When design temperature difference between the interior and exterior of the

duct or plenum does not exceed 15°F (i.e. return air ducts in ceiling spaces).

D. Air Distribution System:

1. Exterior surfaces of outside air, combustion air, mixed air.

One and one-half inch thick fiberglass three pound board with all service jacket. Seal all

joints and pins with tape material to match jacket. Apply material with weld pins or stick

clips.

2. Exterior surfaces of supply and return air plenums where not indicated to be lined:


joints and pins with tape material to match jacket. Apply material with weld pins.

3. Exterior surfaces of exposed supply ductwork not lined:


joints and pins with tape material to match jacket. Apply material with weld pins or stick

clips.

4. Concealed supply ductwork not lined:

Two inch thick 0.75 pound fiberglass duct wrap with foil scrim facings. All joints sealed.

Apply material with adhesive or wire 18 inches o.c.

5. Low pressure round runouts to diffusers:

Two inch thick 0.75 pound fiberglass duct wrap with foil scrim facings. All joints sealed.

Apply material with adhesive or wire 18 inches o.c.

6. See Specification Section 230540 – Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control for

requirements for lined ductwork.

END OF SECTION

AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS 23 37 13 – 1




SECTION 23 37 13 - AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Diffusers.

B. Registers.

C. Grilles.

D. Louvers.

E. Louvered penthouses.

F. Gravity roof hoods.

G. Goosenecks.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS



B. Section 230500- Basic Mechanical Requirements.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 230529 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods: Painting of ductwork visible behind

outlets and inlets.

B. Section 233300 - Ductwork and Accessories.

C. Section 233600 - Air Terminal Units.

D. Section 230593 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. AMCA 500 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.

B. ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

C. ARI 890-91 - Rating of Air Diffusers.

D. ASHRAE 70 - Methods of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets.





E. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard.

F. ASTM C 636 – Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels.


A. Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets in accordance with ASHRAE 70 and ARI 890.

B. Test and rate performance of louvers in accordance with AMCA 500.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to ANSI/NFPA 90A.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Shop Drawings for the following items under provision of The General Conditions of the

Contract:

1. Shop fabricated louvers.

2. Louvered penthouses.

3. Shop fabricated roof hoods.

4. Goosenecks.

B. Submit Product Data for the following items under provision of The General Conditions of the

Contract:

1. Diffusers.

2. Registers.

3. Grilles.

4. Louvers.

5. Gravity roof hoods.

C. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets indicating type, size, location, application, and noise level.

1. Review requirements of outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to

submitting product data and schedules of outlets and inlets.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CEILING DIFFUSERS (SEE AIR DEVICE SCHEDULE ON PLANS)

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Titus, Anemostat, Barber Colman, Krueger, Carnes, Metal-Aire,

Nailor-Hart, Tempo, Air Diffusion Products, Tuttle & Bailey, TurboX, Price, Hart & Cooley.





2.2 CEILING REGISTERS AND GRILLES (SEE AIR DEVICE SCHEDULE ON PLANS)

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Titus, Anemostat, Barber Colman, Krueger, Carnes, Metal-Aire,

Nailor-Hart, Tuttle & Bailey, Price, Hart & Cooley.

Features:

1. Throttle device for individual air control.

2. Clamp collar.

B. Terms Used:

1. L T50: Height above floor, measured at centerline of diffuser, of 50 fpm isovel.

2. Induction ratio: (TZ/T1)-1,

Where: TZ= temperature difference between supply air and ambient.

TL= temperature difference between air stream and ambient, at

distance L from outlet, measured at centerline of outlet.

C. Performance:

1. Maximum L T50 = 4’-0”, based on supply air temperature = 62, and ambient temperature

= 74.

2. Minimum induction ratio = 4, at L T50, with supply air temperature = 62 ambient

temperature = 74.

3. NC = 20 at rated volume.

4. Maximum P = 0.10”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

B. Install ceiling mounted items in accordance with ASTM C 636.

5. Ceiling mounted air terminals or services weighing less than 20 pounds shall be

positively attached to the ceiling suspension main runners or to cross runners with the

same carrying capacity as the main runners.

6. Terminals or services weighing 20 pounds but not more than 56 pounds, in addition to the

above, shall have two No. 12 gauge hangers connected from the terminal or service to the

ceiling system hangers or to the structure above. These wires may be slack.





7. Terminals or services weighing more than 56 pounds shall be supported directly from the

structure above by approved hangers.

C. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with

architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.

D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, regardless of

whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.

E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black.

F. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.

G. Install duct connections to fire rated UL Listed and Labeled diffusers and return grilles in strict

accordance with instructions furnished by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

HEAT TRANSFER 23 57 00 – 1




SECTION 23 57 00 - HEAT TRANSFER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED WORK




Section 230500 - Basic Mechanical Requirements

Section 230529 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods

Section 230540 - Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control

Section 230700 - Mechanical Insulation

Section 232113 - HVAC Piping and Specialties

Section 232123 - HVAC Pumps

Section 235200 - Boilers

Section 236400 - Refrigeration

Section 233400 - Air Handling Fans

Section 237400 - Air Handling Systems on Roof

Section 237410 – Air Handling Unit with Coils

Section 230900 - Electronic Controls

Section 230593 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing


A. The work includes, but is not limited to providing the following:

1. Cabinet Unit Heaters

2. Unit Heaters

3. Electric Cabinet Heaters and Unit Heaters

4. All contactors, relays, terminal boxes, thermostats and other electrical appurtenances for

electric heat in accordance with "ELECTRIC WIRING" paragraph in Section 230529 -

Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.

5. Snowmelt Systems


A. Quality control shall be in accordance with Section 230500 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Reference Standards: Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents,

comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following:

1. Comply with American National Standards Institute (ANSI B31.1) Code for Pressure

Piping.





1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings and Product Data for the following items in accordance

with the General Conditions of the Contract:


2. Unit Heaters

3. Snowmelt System

B. Operating Instructions and Maintenance Data: Submit printed Operating Instructions and

Maintenance Data for the following items in accordance with Operating and Maintenance Data

paragraph in Section 230500:


2. Unit Heaters

3. Snowmelt System

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CABINET UNIT HEATERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Dunham-Bush, Modine, Carrier, Trane, A.A.F., KHD Co., Airtherm,

ITT-Nesbitt, York, McQuay, Sterling, Beacon Morris, Vulcan Inc., First Co., Rittling.

B. Type: Cabinet heaters shall be of the blow-thru cabinet type with hot water heating coil,

capacities and model number as shown on the drawings.

C. Arrangement: Arrangement and cabinet type shall be as shown on the drawings.

D. Cabinet: Shall be constructed of 16 - gauge furniture grade steel. Metal surfaces shall be cleaned,

phosphatized, prime coated, and all exposed surfaces shall be finished in a baked enamel, color to

be selected by Architect. Units on white ceilings shall be white, baked-enamel finish.

E. Fans: Shall be all steel, multi-blade, forward curved, centrifugal-type fan which has been

statically and dynamically balanced to eliminate vibration. Fans shall be two-speed direct-drive or

driven by V-belt and cast-iron sheaves capable of 25% speed variation. Belts shall be oil and heat

resistant.

F. Motor: Shall be of the split-phase, open-type, two-speed, sleeve bearing with resilient mount in

the unit. Motor shall be suitable for current characteristics as shown on the drawings, with built-in

automatic reset, thermal overload protection. Include all contactors/starters required for automatic

operation.

G. Hot Water Heating Coil: Shall be serpentine connected and shall be of the finned copper-tubing

type, and shall be hydrostatically tested to twice the working pressure.

H. Filters: Provide 1" thick, disposable filter located in a frame in the return air stream. Filters shall

be easily removable by removing front access panel.





I. Control: Unit shall have automatic temperature controls as specified in Section 230900 -

Electronic Controls, and shall in addition have internal unit mounted, pre-wired two-speed switch,

and "off".

2.2 ELECTRIC CABINET HEATERS AND UNIT HEATERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Chromalox, Indeeco, Modine, Electromode, Sterling, Raywall,

Markel, QMark.

B. Provide electric cabinet heaters and unit heaters of size and capacity as shown on Drawings.

C. Unit Cabinet: Shall be 14 gauge steel, enameled cabinet, color as selected by Architect, adjustable

discharge louvers.

D. Motor and Blower Fans: Direct drive, blow-through design, two-speed motors and switch,

resilient mounted. Motor and blower to be easily accessible for servicing. Bearings to be factory

lubricated.

E. Electric Heating Elements: Fin-tube with helical fins with overheat protection. Unit to be

furnished with thermostat for remote mounting as shown on drawings, tamperproof. Provide all

contactors, relays, etc., as required. Entire unit to be U.L. approved.

F. Units to be provided with a summer-winter switch to allow operation without heat when desired.

Operation as follows: Fan to be cycled by remote thermostat to maintain space temperature.

Provide delay switch to keep fan from operating on call for heat until heating elements have

warmed up.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 UNIT HEATERS (HORIZONTAL BLOW)

A. Unless noted otherwise, mount high as possible to give greatest headroom possible. Piping shall

be as shown on the plans.

B. Protect the entire unit with a cover during construction.

C. Manufacturers data is to be observed before installation.

3.2 CABINET UNIT HEATERS

A. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

B. Provide access to filters, controls, shut-off valves, etc.

3.3 SNOWMELT SYSTEM





A. Radiant snow melting systems using electric mats and cables embedded in concrete, asphalt, and

below pavers.

B. REFERENCES

1. General: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a

part of this specification section to the extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by

issuing authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation

established by issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to

by issuing authority abbreviation and standard designation.

2. Canadian Standards Association (CSA):

a. CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 130 – Requirements for Electrical Resistance Heating

Cables and Heating Device Sets

b. CSA C02.2 No. 24 – Temperature-Indicating and –Regulating Equipment

c. CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 14 – Industrial Control Equipment

3. National Fore Protection Association (NFPA):

a. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC), especially Sec. 424 and 426

4. Tile Council of North America (TCNA):

a. Any applicable standards relating to the installation of tile or stone.

b. TCNA #RH115-0 – Latex – Portland Cement Mortar, Electric System

c. TCNA #RH116-07 – Cementitious Self-leveling Underlayment, Bonded Electric

System Thin-set

d. TCNA #RH130-07 – EGP (Exterior Glue Plywood) Latex – Portland Cement

Mortar Electric System

e. TCNA #RH135-07 – Backer Board Electric System Thin-set

5. Underwriters Laboratory (UL):

a. UL Standard 508A – Industrial Control Panels

b. UL Standard 515 – Electric Resistance Heat Tracing for Commercial and

Industrial Applications

c. UL Standard 758 – Appliance Wiring Materials

d. UL Standard 873 – Temperature-Indicating and Regulating Equipment

e. UL Standard 1673 – Electric Radiant Heating Cables

f. UL Standard 1693 – Electric Radiant Heating Panels and Heating Panel Sets

6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

a. Any applicable standards relating to the installation of tile or stone.

7. Watts Radiant

a. Watts Radiant ProMelt Installation Manual

b. Watts Radiant Electric Floor Warming Design Software (WireWorks)

C. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1. Design Requirements:

a. Show compliance with UL, CSA Standards.

b. Show compliance with any applicable ANSI or NTCA Standards as they relate

to the installation of tile or stone.

2. Performance Requirements:





a. Provide electric snow melting system manufactured, fabricated, and installed to

comply with regulatory agencies and authorities with jurisdiction

b. Maintain performance criteria stated by the manufacturer without defects,

damage, or failure.

3.

D. SUBMITTALS

1. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and

Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.

2. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product submittal data and installation instructions

for each product.

3. Shop Drawings – Electric Snow Melting System:

a. Provide installation drawings indicating detailed mat/cable layout for each area,

mat/cable dimensions, snow melting sensor/control locations, zoning

requirements, and/or other details required for installation of the system.

b. Provide electrical schematics, as needed

4. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples of primary materials.

5. Documentation:

a. Provide manufacturer’s detailed instructions for site preparation and product

installation.

b. Provide manufacturer’s electrical power requirements and heat output in watts

delivered to the structure.

c. Provide documentation indicating the installer is trained to install the

manufacturer’s products, as needed.

6. Quality Assurance and Control Submittals:

a. Upon request, submit test reports from recognized testing laboratories.

7. Closeout Submittals – Submit the following:

a. Warranty documents specified

b. Operation and maintenance data

c. Manufacturer’s field reports as specified in this document

d. Final as-built mat/cable layout drawing

E. QUALITY ASSURANCE

1. Manufacturer Qualifications:

a. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten years experience in similar systems.

b. Manufacturer shall provide products of consistent quality in appearance and

physical properties.

c. Manufacturer shall use the highest quality products in the production of systems

and components referenced in this document.

d. Manufacturer to submit finished mat/cable assembly to minimum 1500 volt

dielectric test for insulation integrity and perform resistance verification check.

e. Verify mat/cable is affixed with UL or ETL Marked sticker on power lead

indication model, serial number, manufacture date, resistance, total output, and

voltage.





f. Materials shall be from a single manufacturer to ensure consistent quality and

compatibility.

2. Installer Qualifications:

a. Use and installer with demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and

complexity and/or documentation proving successful completion of

familiarization training hosted/approved in writing by the system manufacturer.

b. Electrical rough-in and connections shall be done by a licensed electrician.

3. Certifications: Provide letters of certification as follows:

a. Installer employs skilled workers holding a trade qualification license or

equivalent, or apprentices under the supervision of a licensed trades person.

4. Regulatory Requirements and Approvals – Electric Snow Melting Systems: Provide an

electric snow melting system that complies with the following requirements:

a. Snow melting cables/mats for installation in concrete, asphalt, or under pavers

shall be Listed to UL 515 and CSA C22.2 No. 130.

b. Snow melting sensors shall be UL listed or low-voltage.

c. Snow melting controls shall be Listed to UL 508a and CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 14.

5. Pre-installation meetings

a. Verify project requirements, substrate conditions, excavation conditions, system

performance requirements, coverings, manufacturer’s installation instructions,

and warranty requirements.

b. Review project construction timeline to ensure compliance or discuss

modifications as required.

c. Coordinate with other trade representatives to verify areas of responsibility.

d. Establish the frequency (during construction phase of the project) the engineer

intends for site visits and inspections by the manufacturer’s representative.

6. Mock-up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and

application workmanship.

a. Finish areas designated by Architect

b. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are

approved by Architect.

c. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work

F. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

1. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Section.

2. Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid

construction delays.

3. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with

identification labels intact.

4. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at

temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.

G. PROJECT CONDITIONS





1. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits

recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under

environmental conditions outside manufacturer’s absolute limits.

2. Morter-set Systems: Mortar shall cure for 25 days (or time specified by mortar

manufacturer) prior to starting heating systems.

H. WARRANTY

1. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions.

2. Manufacturer’s Warranty:

a. Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty document executed by authorized

company official.

b. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights

Owner may have under contract documents.

1) Warranty covers the repair or replacement of any materials proven

defective.

1) Warranty may transfer to subsequent owners.

1) Warranty Period for Electric Floor Heating Mats/Cables: Refer to

manufacturer’s 25-year, prorated warranty against failure due to defect

in material or workmanship, beginning with date of manufacture.

1) Warranty Period for Thermostats, Controls, and Accessories: Refer to

manufacturer’s 1-year (2-year for SunStat), non-prorated warranty

against failure due to defect in material or workmanship, beginning

with date of purchase.

I. SYSTEM START-UP

1. Do not start the system for a minimum of 25 days or as specified by mortar, concrete

and/or covering manufacturer as applicable.

2. Verify all electrical components are installed per local and National Electrical Code

(NEC) prior to start-up.

J. OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS

1. Instruct Owner about operation and maintenance of installed system.

2. Provide Owner with manufacturer’s installation instructions for installed components

within the system, including ohm reading information for the mats/cables as recorded in

installation manual.

3. Provide Owner with all operating instructions/documents for sensors and controls.

4. Provide Owner with copies of any detailed layout drawings and photos of installed

product before coverings are installed.

3.4 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Acceptable Manufacturer:





Watts Radiant

A Watts Water Technologies Company

4500 E. Progress Place

Springfield, MO 65803

(800) 276-2419; (417) 864-6108; Fax: (417) 864-8161

Web: http://www.wattsradiant.com

2. Substitutions: not permitted

B. PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICS

1. Electric Snow Melting System: ProMelt electric snow melting systems including:

a. ProMelt mats

b. ProMelt cables.

C. ELECTRIC SNOW MELTING MAT

1. Snow melting mat to have the following construction:

a. Heating Cable Construction: Dual heating elements with reinforcement and

insulated, ground system, and outer jacket.

b. Power Lead Construction: Insulated current-carrying conductors, ground

system, outer jacket; minimum 20 feet (6.1 m) long.

c. Mat Construction: Heating cable secured to open mesh system in pre-set

spacing.

2. Size:

a. Mat size in widths of 2 feet (610 mm), 3 feet (914 mm) and lengths of 5 feet (1.5

m) through 56 feet (17.1 m) – Refer to Drawings.

3. Ratings:

a. Mat shall be provided in 120VAC, 208VAC, 240VAC, or 277VAC per

drawings and submittals.

b. 38 watts per square foot (129 Btu/h/sgft) or 50 watts per square foot (171

Btu/h/sqft).

4. Models:

a. Mat shall be model series SM as supplied by Watts Radiant.

D. ELECTRIC SNOW MELTING CABLE

1. Snow melting cable to have the following construction:

a. Heating Cable Construction: Dual heating elements with reinforcement and

insulated, ground system, and outer jacket.

b. Power Lead Construction: Insulated current-carrying conductors, ground

system, outer jacket; minimum 20 feet (6.1 m) long.

c. Packaging: Cable wound onto spool or proprietary package system.

2. Size:

a. Cable size in factory set lengths of 29 feet (8.8 m) up to 456 feet (139 m).

Cannot be cut to length on site. Refer to Drawings.

3. Ratings:

http://www.wattsradiant.com/





a. Cable shall be provided in 120VAC, 208VAC, 240VAC, or 277VAC per

drawings and submittals.

b. Secured using cable ties or proprietary Cable Strap, allow on-site spacing at 3

inch (76 mm) o.c. (50 watts/sqft (171 Btu/h/sqft)), or 4 inch (101 mm) o.c.(38

watts/sqft (129 Btu/h/sqft)). Refer to Drawings.

4. Models:

a. Cable shall be model series SC as supplied by Watts Radiant.

E. ELECTRIC SNOW MELTING SENSORS/CONTROLS

1. Use sensors/controls provided by system manufacturer.

a. ProMelt PM-2B Detector:

1) Automatic moisture and temperature detection

1) Adjustable trigger temperature

1) Pole-mounted, outdoor-rated

1) Moisture sensor fixed to the detector

1) 120/208/240V, not 277V, maximum 30A load

b. ProMelt PM-224 Detector:




1) Moisture sensor fixed to the detector

1) 24V (Operates in conjunction with the ContactorPro)

c. ProMelt PM-824 Detector:




1) Moisture sensor connected to the detector by a 10 ft cable


d. ProMelt PM-DP Display Panel:

1) Remote monitor for the ProMelt PM-2B detector

1) Manual On, Automatic, and Standby operations

1) 24V (supplied by PM-2B)

e. ProMelt PM-HSC5 Slab Detector:


1) Slab-mounted


f. ProMelt CP-50 ContactorPro Panel:

1) Turn-key contactor panel

1) Operates in conjunction with the ProMelt PM-224, PM-824, or PM-

HSC5 detectors

1) Manual On with timer or Automatic operation

1) NEMA Type 1 for indoor mounting

1) 120/208/240/277V with one (1) 50A contactor

g. ProMelt CP-100 ContactorPro Panel:



HSC5 detectors



1) 120/208/240/277V with two (2) 50A contactors

h. ProMelt CP-200 ContactorPro Panel:







HSC5 detectors



1) 120/208/240/277V with four (4) 50A contactors

i. ProMelt CP-200EX ContactorPro Extension Panel:


1) Operates in conjunction with the ProMelt PM-50, PM-100, or PM-200

panels


1) 120/208/240/277V with four (4) 50A contactors

F. ELECTRIC SNOW MELTING ACCESSORY COMPONENTS

1. Monitoring Device: Use device called LoudMouth provided by manufacturer. It is

battery powered and connects to all three power lead wires of mats/cable to monitor

installation. Provides both visual (red LED) and audio (loud beep) alarms if heating

mats/cables are damaged.

2. CableTrowel: For system compatibility, use manufacturer’s plastic CableTrowel to help

prevent cutting of the heating mat/cable during thin-set mortar installation.

3. CableStrap: For system compatibility in floor heating cable installations, use

manufacturer’s CableStrap. CableStrap to allow different cable spacings:

a. 3 inch (76 mm) o.c. (50 watts/sqft)

b. 4 inch (101 mm) o.c. (38 watts/sqft).

3.5 EXECUTION

A. EXAMINATION

1. Site Verification of Conditions:

a. Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of the system. Refer to

manufacturer’s installation manual for information.

b. Do not proceed with installation of the system until unacceptable conditions are

corrected.

B. INSTALLATION OF ELECTRIC SNOW MELTING SYSTEM

1. Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including product technical bulletins,

installation instructions and design drawings.

2. Electric snow melting mat

a. Test the resistance and insulation integrity of the mat and record.

b. Verify that the site is ready to receive the mat, including all base substrate

preparation.

c. Prepare electrical per drawings and bring electrical conduit to the site for the

power leads and slab sensor (if used).

d. Test-fit the mat in the area specified. Mat heating cable cannot be cut shorter to

fit.

e. Secure the mat to the substrate or reinforcement material as required.

f. Secure the slab sensor (if used).





g. Test the resistance and insulation integrity of the mat and record.

h. Pull mat power leads into electrical conduit.

i. Photograph installation for records.

j. Install coverings of concrete; asphalt (maximum 285°F); sand/stone dust and

pavers; or mortar and tile. Minimum 1 to 1 ½ inch thick covering.

k. Install marker plate identifying snow melting product in the area.

l. Test the resistance and insulation integrity of the mat and record.

m. Make electrical connections to snow melting mat, sensors/controls, and power

source. Test system briefly and shut down.

3. Electric snow melting cable

a. Test the resistance and insulation integrity of the cable and record.

b. Verify that the site is ready to receive the cable, including all base substrate

preparation.

c. Prepare electrical per drawings and bring electrical conduit to the site for the

power leads and slab sensor (if used).

d. Verify measurements of area specified are correct per cable size. Cable cannot

be cut shorter to fit.

e. Secure the cable to the substrate (using CableStrap) or reinforcement material

(using plastic cable ties) as required.

f. Secure the slab sensor (if used).

g. Test the resistance and insulation integrity of the cable and record.

h. Pull cable power leads into electrical outlet.

i. Photograph installation for records.

j. Install coverings of concrete; asphalt (maximum 285°F); sand/stone dust and

pavers; or mortar and tile. Minimum 1 to 1 ½ inch thick covering.

k. Install marker plate identifying snow melting product in the area.

l. Test the resistance and insulation integrity of the cable and record.

m. Make electrical connections to snow melting mat, sensors/controls, and power

source. Test system briefly and shut down.

C. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING

1. Site tests:

a. To ensure system integrity, do not damage the system or cut heating cable for

any reason. Cover heating mat/cable against site damage if there is a delay

between product installation and floor covering installation.

b. Perform electrical resistance measurements and record in the mat/cable

installation manual as required before, during, and after product installation.

c. If LoudMouth monitor device is used, secure before installation begins and

remove only after final coverings are finished including grout application.

d. Test system briefly after installation for function and integrity but do not place

system into full operation until mortars or other coverings as applicable are fully

cured per manufacturer specifications.

e. Keep records of system products, test results, and photographs for inspection.

D. CLEANING

1. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas.

2. Repair or replace damaged installed products.





3. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to Owner’s

acceptance.

4. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris.

E. DEMONSTRATION

1. Electric Snow Melting System

a. Demonstrate operation of snow melting system to Owner or Owner’s personnel.

b. Advise the Owner or Owner’s representative about the required cure time for

mortar or other covering as applicable before putting system into full operation.

c. Provide Owner or Owner’s personnel with manufacturer’s installation,

operation, and maintenance instructions for installed components within the

system.

F. PROTECTION

1. Protect installed work from damage caused by subsequent construction activity on the

site. Provide Owner with copy of photos and drawings of product locations to assist.

END OF SECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS 260000 - 1

U OF U BLDG 73 REMODEL - PHASE 2a CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS


TABLE OF CONTENTS 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 1

U OF U BLDG 73 REMODEL - PHASE 2a CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS GSBS PROJECT. NO. 2018.064.01 | U OF U PROJECT. NO. 22363

SECTION 260500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARYs


1. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 2. Sleeve seals. 3. Grout. 4. Common electrical installation requirements.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For sleeve seals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral water stop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side more than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.



1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.3 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.



B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants.".

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve



seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."


LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1


SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.


1. Section 260513 "Medium-Voltage Cables" for single-conductor and multiconductor cables, cable splices, and terminations for electrical distribution systems with 2001 to 35,000 V.

2. Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for control systems communications cables and Classes 1, 2 and 3 control cables.

3. Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cabling used for voice and data circuits.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. VFC: Variable frequency controller.




A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Field quality-control reports.




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Alpha Wire Company; 2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; 3. Belden Inc; 4. Cerro Wire LLC; 5. Encore Wire Corporation; 6. General Cable Technologies Corporation; 7. General Cable; General Cable Corporation; 8. Senator Wire & Cable Company; 9. Southwire Company;

B. Aluminum and Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658

D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 with ground wire.

E. VFC Cable:

1. Comply with UL 1277, UL 1685, and NFPA 70 for Type TC-ER cable. 2. Type TC-ER with oversized crosslinked polyethylene insulation, spiral-wrapped foil plus

85 percent coverage braided shields and insulated full-size ground wire and sunlight- and oil-resistant outer PVC jacket.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES


1. 3M; 2. AFC Cable Systems, Inc; 3. Gardner Bender; 4. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.;


















5. Ideal Industries, Inc.; 6. ILSCO; 7. NSi Industries LLC; 8. O-Z/Gedney; an EGS Electrical Group brand; an Emerson Industrial Automation

business; 9. Tyco Electronics Corp.;

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway

E. Feeders in Cable Tray: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway

F. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway









G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway

H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway

I. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

J. VFC Output Circuits: Type XHHW-2 in metal conduit

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

G. Complete cable tray systems installation according to Section 260536 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems" prior to installing conductors and cables.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least [6 inches (150 mm)] [12 inches (300 mm)] of slack.



3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. Correct deficiencies determined during the scan.

a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.



c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

D. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. 3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

E. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1


SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications:

1. Underground distribution grounding. 2. Ground bonding common with lightning protection system. 3. Foundation steel electrodes.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.


A. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC. 3. ERICO International Corporation. 4. Fushi Copperweld Inc. 5. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC. 6. Harger Lightning & Grounding. 7. ILSCO.











8. O-Z/Gedney; an EGS Electrical Group brand; an Emerson Industrial Automation business.

9. Robbins Lightning, Inc. 10. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.3 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in

diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches (6.3 by 100 mm) in cross section, with 9/32-inch (7.14-mm) holes spaced 1-1/8 inches (28 mm) apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.







D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad 3/4 inch by 10 feet (19 mm by 3 m)

B. Grounding Electrodes: Copper tube, straight or L-shaped, charged with nonhazardous electrolytic chemical salts

1. Termination: Factory-attached No. 4/0 AWG bare conductor at least 48 inches (1200 mm) long.

2. Backfill Material: Electrode manufacturer's recommended material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade. 2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank when

indicated as part of duct-bank installation.

C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow.

D. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches (50 mm) minimum from wall, 6 inches (150 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

E. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.



4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE

A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.

3.3 GROUNDING SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS

A. Generator: Install grounding electrode(s) at the generator location. The electrode shall be connected to the equipment grounding conductor and to the frame of the generator.

3.4 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches (100 mm) will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches (50 mm) above to 6 inches (150 mm) below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.

C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields according to written instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.

D. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and ground ring around the pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for ground ring and for taps to equipment grounding terminals. Bury ground ring not less than 6 inches (150 mm) from the foundation.

3.5 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:



1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs. 8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from

grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway.

9. X-Ray Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in circuits supplying x-ray equipment.

C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

E. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.

F. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.

G. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.

H. Metallic Fences: Comply with requirements of IEEE C2.

1. Grounding Conductor: Bare, tinned copper, not less than No. 8 AWG. 2. Gates: Shall be bonded to the grounding conductor with a flexible bonding jumper. 3. Barbed Wire: Strands shall be bonded to the grounding conductor.



3.6 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.

C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

D. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are specified in Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems," and shall be at least 12 inches (300 mm) deep, with cover.

1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor.

E. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

F. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect



grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.

G. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

H. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet (18 m) apart.

1. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2/0 AWG for ground ring and for taps to building steel.

2. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches (600 mm) from building's foundation.

I. Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode (Ufer Ground): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; using electrically conductive coated steel reinforcing bars or rods, at least 20 feet (6.0 m) long. If reinforcing is in multiple pieces, connect together by the usual steel tie wires or exothermic welding to create the required length.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.



4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

E. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1


SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for products and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.


A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.



D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of [five] times the applied force.



A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete Specifications.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Metal Ties Innovation. f. Thomas & Betts Corporation, A Member of the ABB Group. g. Unistrut; an Atkore International company. h. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.

3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.











B. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels and angles with 9/16-inch- (14-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (200 mm) o.c., in at least 1 surface.


a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited. d. Seasafe, Inc.; AMICO, a Gibraltar Industries Company.

2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items.

3. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles. 4. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.

C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Hilti, Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.













a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti, Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.









3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69 6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.



3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa) 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting", Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.


RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1


SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 5. Surface raceways. 6. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 7. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.


1. Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction.

2. Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for conduits, wireways, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, faceplate adapters, enclosures, cabinets, and handholes serving communications systems.

3. Section 280528 "Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security" for conduits, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, and faceplate adapters serving electronic safety and security.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.

B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.



B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.


A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:

1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with

common supports.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

D. Source quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Electri-Flex Company. 5. FSR Inc. 6. O-Z/Gedney; an EGS Electrical Group brand; an Emerson Industrial Automation

business. 7. Patriot Aluminum Products, LLC. 8. Picoma Industries. 9. Republic Conduit.













10. Robroy Industries. 11. Southwire Company. 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation, A Member of the ABB Group. 13. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 14. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.

E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

F. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum.

G. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

H. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel

I. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

J. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70.

2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel b. Type: compression

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1 mm), with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

K. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.








2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 3. Arnco Corporation. 4. CANTEX INC. 5. CertainTeed Corporation. 6. Condux International, Inc. 7. Electri-Flex Company. 8. Kraloy. 9. Lamson & Sessions. 10. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 11. RACO; Hubbell. 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation, A Member of the ABB Group.

B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.

D. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.

E. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.

F. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.

G. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B.

H. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D 3485.

I. RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14.

J. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

K. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.

L. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

M. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
















2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection. 3. MonoSystems, Inc. 4. Square D.

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Tele-Power Poles:

1. Material: Galvanized steel with ivory baked-enamel finish 2. Fittings and Accessories: Dividers, end caps, covers, cutouts, wiring harnesses, devices,

mounting materials, and other fittings shall match and mate with tele-power pole as required for complete system.

2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Adalet. 2. Cooper Technologies Company. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.













5. FSR Inc. 6. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection. 7. Hubbell Incorporated. 8. Kraloy. 9. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 10. MonoSystems, Inc. 11. Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions. 12. O-Z/Gedney; an EGS Electrical Group brand; an Emerson Industrial Automation

business. 13. RACO; Hubbell. 14. Robroy Industries. 15. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 16. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures. 17. Thomas & Betts Corporation, A Member of the ABB Group. 18. Wiremold / Legrand.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy Type FD, with gasketed cover.

E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

F. Metal Floor Boxes:

1. Material: Cast metal 2. Type: Semi-adjustable. 3. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

G. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb (23 kg). Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb (23 kg) shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.

H. Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of paddle fan weighing 70 lb (32 kg).

1. Listing and Labeling: Paddle fan outlet boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

I. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.


















J. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.

K. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

L. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm square by 60 mm deep)

M. Gangable boxes are prohibited.

N. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Fiberglass. 3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

O. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.6 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:

1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.

2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with frame and covers of reinforced concrete.


a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. NewBasis. d. Nordic Fiberglass, Inc.








e. Oldcastle Precast, Inc. f. Quazite: Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. g. Synertech Moulded Products.

2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 3. Color of Frame and Cover: Green. 4. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with closed bottom unless otherwise indicated. 5. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 6. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 7. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." 8. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts

for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 9. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long (300 mm Wide by 600 mm Long) and

Larger: Have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES

A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied. 1. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing

agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.

2. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012 and traceable to NIST standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: IMC 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: IMC 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFNC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT 2. Exposed and Subject to Physical Damage: IMC. Raceway locations include the

following:






a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. c. Mechanical rooms. d. Gymnasiums. e. Equipment room

3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT to be used for homeruns, MC cable with ground is allowed to be used from homerun to devises.

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

5. Damp or Wet Locations: IMC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless

steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use setscrew steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

F. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F (49 deg C)

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.



D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

H. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm)of enclosures to which attached.

I. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot (3-m)intervals.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) of concrete cover in all directions.

4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location.

5. Change from ENT to IMC before rising above floor.

J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

L. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

M. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

N. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35mm) trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm) trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.



O. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

P. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

Q. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

R. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

S. Surface Raceways:

1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm)radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not

exceeding 48 inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

T. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

U. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

V. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

W. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m). Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F (55 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet (30 m).

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:



a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C)] temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C)] temperature change.

c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change.

d. Attics: 135 deg F (75 deg C) temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

X. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

Y. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

Z. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

AA. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

BB. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

CC. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

DD. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:



1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end

of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) on each side of the coupling.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

5. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above direct-buried conduits but a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) below grade. Align planks along centerline of conduit.

6. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.

D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, 30” Minimum below grade.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.



F. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.


SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 1


SECTION 260548 - SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Restraint channel bracings. 2. Restraint cables. 3. Seismic-restraint accessories. 4. Mechanical anchor bolts. 5. Adhesive anchor bolts.


1. Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for commonly used electrical supports and installation requirements.



1. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.

a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES and OSHPD

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

2. Seismic[- and Wind]-Restraint Details:

a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic and wind restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and



values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.

c. Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with wind-restraint details required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

d. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an evaluation service member of ICC-ES and OSHPD showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer

C. Welding certificates.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis. They shall bear anchorage preapproval from OSHPD in addition to preapproval, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings, by ICC-ES or another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) that support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Wind-Restraint Loading:

1. Basic Wind Speed: 100. 2. Building Classification Category: III 3. Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft. (48.8 kg/sq. m) multiplied by maximum area of HVAC component

projected on vertical plane normal to wind direction and 45 degrees either side of normal.

B. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: As identified on architectural document 2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: As identified

on architectural document

a. Component Importance Factor: 1.5 b. Component Response Modification Factor: 2.5 c. Component Amplification Factor: 2.5

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): As identified on architectural document.

4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: As identified on architectural document

2.2 RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc. 4. Unistrut; an Atkore International company.

B. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end, with other matching components, and with corrosion-resistant coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

2.3 RESTRAINT CABLES










1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 2. Loos & Co., Inc. 3. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables. End connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

2.4 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc. 4. TOLCO; a brand of NIBCO INC.

B. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod.

C. Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching hangers to rigid channel bracings and restraint cables.

D. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.

E. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.

F. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.

2.5 MECHANICAL ANCHOR BOLTS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 4. Mason Industries, Inc.
















B. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

2.6 ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS


1. Hilti, Inc. 2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc.

B. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing PVC or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.


3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES and OSHPD

B. Hanger-Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger-rod stiffeners where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods caused by seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.







3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork

B. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:

1. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

2. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES and OSHPD providing required submittals for component.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

D. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

E. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

F. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where connection is terminated to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.




A. Perform the following tests and inspections

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members.

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.

B. Seismic controls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.


IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1


SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products.


A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.



B. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.

2.2 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.

B. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.

2.3 FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A. 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, 5-mil (0.125-mm) pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay.

2.4 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Tape:

1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical utility lines.

2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when

exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

B. Color and Printing:

1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE, 3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,

COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE, >.

C. Tag:

1. Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core, bright-colored, compounded for direct-burial service.

2. Overall Thickness: 5 mils (0.125 mm).



3. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil (0.00889 mm). 4. Weight: 28 lb/1000 sq. ft. (13.7 kg/100 sq. m). 5. 3-Inch (75-mm) Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 70 lbf (311.3 N), and 4600 psi (31.7

MPa).

2.5 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)."

2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

B. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

C. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch (25 mm)

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

D. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

E. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.

F. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.

G. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. Emergency Power. 2. Power. 3. UPS.

B. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder and branch-circuit conductors.



a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit.

b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow.

d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

C. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

D. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.

E. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

F. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.

1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in

raceway.

G. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

H. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesive warning labels



1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections.

I. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

J. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer

K. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with

appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.


COMMON FILL 31 05 13

379

SECTION 31 05 13

COMMON FILL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Common fill material. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM Standards: C136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. D448 Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge

Construction. D1883 CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of Laboratory-Compacted

Soils. D2487 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes. D2844 Resistance R-Value and Expansion Pressure of Compacted

Soils. D3282 Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures for

Highway Construction Purposes. D3740 Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or

Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction.

F1647 Organic Matter Content of Putting Green and Sports Turf Root Zone Mixes.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General. If a change in source of material is required, submit name of

Supplier, source and gradation analysis of material before delivery to site.

B. Topsoil. Submit certification from topsoil Supplier assuring topsoil product meets requirements in this Section.

C. Borrow, granular borrow, granular backfill borrow, recycled fill, sand, gravel. Before delivering material to site, identify:

1. Name of Supplier and source. 2. Gradation, classification and CBR. 3. Percent composition of reclaimed bitumionous concrete or Portland

cement concrete included in the mix. D. Slag, pumice, scoria. Identify name of supplier, source, and density.

31 05 13 COMMON FILL

380

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use a laboratory that complies with ASTM D3740 and Section 01 45 00

requirements. B. Reject fill products that do not meet requirements of this section. C. Remove product found defective after installation and install acceptable

product at no additional cost to OWNER. 1.5 ACCEPTANCE A. General: 1. Acceptance is by Lot. One (1) lot is one (1) day productionl 2. Dispute resolution, Section 01 35 10. B. Roadway Backfill: Sub-lot size is 5,000 tons.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 BORROW A. Classifications A-1-a through A-4, ASTM D3282. 2.2 GRANULAR BORROW A. Classifications A-1-a, A-1-b, A-2-4, or A-3, ASTM D3282. B. Material meets design CBR-value (ASTM D1883) or R value (ASTM

D2844) for suitability of source, not for project control testing. 2.3 GRANULAR BACKFILL BORROW A. Classification A-1, ASTM D3282. B. Well graded. C. Particle size, two (2) inch maximum. D. Material meets design CBR-value (ASTM D1883) or R value (ASTM

D2844) for suitability of source, not for project control testing. 2.4 RECYCLED FILL A. Material: Pulverized Portland cement concrete, pulverized bitumionous

concrete pavement or combination, either mixed with or not mixed with a new aggregate.

B. Gradation: Meet requirements of this section based upon use; e.g. borrow, granular borrow, granular backfill borrow, etc.

2.5 NATIVE A. When allowed by ENGINEER, material obtained from Excavations may

be used as fill, provided organic material, rubbish, debris, and other objectionable materials are removed and CONTRACTOR has submitted the appropriate proctor density data (see Section 31 23 26).

2.6 CLAY A. Classification CL, CL-ML, or ML, ASTM D2487. B. Free of organic matter, frozen material, debris, rocks, and deleterious

COMMON FILL 31 05 13

381

materials. C. Homogeneous, relatively uniform. 2.7 SAND A. Friable river or bank aggregate, free of loam and organic matter. Graded

as follows. Percent Passing Sieve by Weight 3/8 100 100 1 – 10 2.8 GRAVEL A. Material: Rock, stone, or other high quality mineral particle or

combination. Sewer Rock. ASTM Nominal Size Size No. 3.5 to 1.5” 1 2.5 to 1.5” 2 2 to 1” 3 1.5 to 3/4” 4 1 to 1/2" 5 Pea Gravel. ASTM Nominal Size Size No. 3/4 to 3/8” 6 1/2 to No. 4 7 3/8 to No. 8 8 No. 4 to No. 16 9 No. 4 (screenings) 10 2.9 TOPSOIL A. Chemical Characteristics: 1. Acidity and alkalinity range: pH 5.5 to 7.7 2. Soluble Salts: Less than 2.0 mmhos/cm. 3. Sodium Absorption Ratio (SAR): less than 3.0 4. Nitrogen (NO3N): 48 ppm minimum 5. Phosphorus (P): 11 ppm minimum 6. Potash (K): 130 ppm minimum 7. Iron (Fe): 5.0 ppm minimum B. Physical Characteristics: 1. Fertile, loose, friable. 2. Free of weeds, subsoil, lumps or clods of hard earth, plants or their

roots, sticks, toxic minerals, chemicals and stones greater than 1-1/2 inch diameter.

31 05 13 COMMON FILL

382

3. Composition, ASTM D2487: Material Percent Sand 15 – 60 Silt 10 – 70 Clay 5 – 30 Organic matter 2 - 5

Humus determined by ASTM F1647. Peat may be used as an organic

amendment to meet the humus requirements. 2.10 SLAG, PUMICE, SCORIA A. Chemically inert, porous, durable, free draining.

Table 1 – Gradation and Density Criteria Slag Pumice Scoria

Gradation, US Sieve

3” 100 100 100 1 1/2" 80 – 100 80 – 100 80 – 100 3/4" 20 – 100 -- -- 3/8” 0 – 20 0 – 20 40 – 100 No. 4 0 – 10 0 – 10 10 – 70 No. 16 -- 0 – 65 0 – 40 No. 50 -- 0 – 40 0 – 25 No. 200 0 – 3 0 – 3 0 – 15

Density, pound per cubic foot 85 – 100 75 – 80 60 – 75

NOTES: (a) Gradations are based upon percent of material passing sieve by

weight, ASTM C136. (b) Density measured as in-place target.

2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify gradation, ASTM C136. B. Select samples on a random location and time basis. C. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change

materials and retest at no additional cost to OWNER.

PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used

END OF SECTION

SITE CLEARING 31 11 00

405

SECTION 31 11 00

SITE CLEARING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Removal of trees, stumps, roots, and tree debris. B. Clearing site of plant life, root systems and shrubs. C. Removal of fences, fence posts, mail box posts, and miscellany. 1.2 REFERENCES A. NAA Standards: Pruning Standards for Shade Trees. B. Utah Shade Tree Pruning Standards. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide at least one person, who is familiar with NAA pruning standards

for the type of tree involved, to be present during tree pruning operations.

1.4 SITE CONDITIONS A. Repair or replace damaged trees and shrubs at no additional cost to

OWNER. 1.5 PROTECTION A. Protect roots and branches of trees to remain. B. Construct temporary barricading at tree's approximated drip line. Place

continuous barricades at least three (3) feet high. C. When setting posts, avoid damaging tree roots. D. Do not permit heavy equipment or stockpiling of materials or debris

within the barricaded area, or permit earth surface to be changed. E. Provide water and fertilizer to maintain existing trees.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STUMP TREATMENT SOLUTION A. Formulated to kill existing vegetation.

31 11 00 SITE CLEARING

406

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. The drawings do not purport to show all trees and shrubs existing on site. B. Verify with ENGINEER which plantings are to be removed or to remain. C. Tree root inspection: 1. Assist ENGINEER by removing and replacing existing surface

improvements. 2. Cost of removals and replacements will be paid for using existing

payment prices, or if none, then by using contract Modification prices.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Locate utilities. Preserve utilities that are to remain in service, Section

31 23 16. B. Review work procedures with ENGINEER. C. Schedule work carefully with consideration for property owners and

general public. D. Before starting, arrange for disconnection of all utility services that are

to be removed or which interfere with work. 3.3 SITE CLEARING A. Remove all vegetation outside of excavation, fill slope lines, and limits

of slope rounding. B. Remove fences, posts, appurtenances, and miscellaneous objects. 3.4 TREE REMOVAL A. Remove branches, limbs, and debris. B. Remove stumps and roots to 18 inches below proposed grade. C. For stumps larger than six (6) inches caliper remove and treat as follows: 1. Remove chips and debris from around remaining stump. 2. Apply stump treatment solution in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations. 3. Do not allow chemical solution to mist, drip, drift, or splash onto

adjacent ground surfaces or desirable vegetation. 4. Replace any existing vegetation damaged or killed through improper

use of chemical at no additional cost to OWNER.

END OF SECTION

EXCAVATION 31 23 16

407

SECTION 31 23 16

EXCAVATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavation and disposal of excavated materials. B. Protection of existing facilities such as utilities, vegetation, structures

affected by excavation, etc. 1.2 PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. No Contract Time extension shall be granted and no additional

compensation shall be made if buried utilities or structures that conflict with the Work have not been found by Keyholing.

B. Perform Incidental Excavation at no additional cost to OWNER. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Authorized Over Excavation: Upper limit of excavation is proposed

excavation limit. Lower and lateral limits are as authorized by ENGINEER.

B. Classified Excavation: The excavation of specified materials. C. Incidental Excavation: Excavation done for CONTRACTOR's benefit,

excavation error, dewatering of excavation, slough, or over-break. D. Unclassified Excavation: The excavation of all materials encountered

regardless of the nature, size, or manner in which they are removed. Presence of isolated boulders or rock fragments will not be sufficient cause to change classification of surrounding materials.

E. Keyholing: The process of making a small, precisely controlled hole for “day-lighting”, or uncovering and exposing underground utilities, in order to locate or inspect them.

1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Stockpile excavated material to cause minimum inconvenience to public

and provide for emergency services as necessary. B. Provide free access to existing fire hydrants, water valves, gas valves,

and meters. C. Provide free flow of storm water in all gutters, conduits, and natural

water courses. D. Utilize traffic control signs, markers, and procedures in product storage

and handling activities. E. Promptly remove other material from site.

31 23 16 EXCAVATION

408

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 BACKFILL MATERIALS A. Common fill, Section 31 05 13. B. Aggregate base course, Section 32 11 23. C. Stabilization fill, aggregate base course or common fill with maximum

rectilinear particle size of two (2) inches. D. Stabilization fabric, Section 31 05 19.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION A. Photograph existing surfaces where work will take place to document

conditions before excavation, Section 01 78 39. B. Use white paint and mark the proposed excavation. C. Call the one-call center and wait the required amount of time. Colors of

one call center marks indicate the following: White Proposed excavation Red Electric power lines, cables, conduit and lighting cables Yellow Gas, oil, steam, petroleum or gaseous materials. Orange Communications, alarm, signal, cables or conduits. Blue Potable water. Purple Reclaimed water, irrigation and slurry lines. Green Sewer and storm drain lines. Pink Temporary survey markings.

D. Implement traffic control plan requirements, Section 01 55 26. E. For temporary controls, refer to Section 01 57 00. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Identify required lines, grades, contours, and benchmarks, Section 01 71

23. B. Utilities: 1. Keyhole, expose or otherwise locate utilities as necessary to give

utility agency at least one (1) day notice to protect, preserve, or relocate a utility that may interfere with or may be damaged by excavation work. Perserve utilities that remain in service.

2. Where utilities or structures conflict with design grades, report conflict to appropriate utility company and ENGINEER 14 days before initiating work within the conflict area.

C. Support and protect from damage any existing facility and structure that

EXCAVATION 31 23 16

409

exists in, passes through, or passes under the site. D. Protect existing landscape sprinkler systems. When sprinkler system

disturbance is required, interrupt and repair system so operation of system is maintained, Section 02 41 13.

E. Carefully remove soil around tree roots so ENGINEER can assess stability and health of tree.

3.3 GENERAL EXCAVATION REQUIREMENTS A. Excavate topsoil from areas to be relandscaped or regraded and other

marked areas. B. Excavate site to line and grade indicated. Legally dispose of excavated

material. C. Carefully excavate soils in vicinity of buried utility marks placed by the

one-call center. D. Where soil has been softened or eroded by flooding or hardened by

drying, rework all damaged areas or replace with approved material at no additional cost to OWNER.

E. Notify ENGINEER of unexpected subsurface conditions. F. Underpin adjacent structure, service utilities and pipe chases that may be

damaged by excavation work. G. Protect excavation walls as required. If conditions permit, slope

excavation sides to maintain a safe and clean working area. Remove loose materials.

H. Where ENGINEER deems subgrade material to be susceptible to frost heave or otherwise unsatisfactory, excavate additional depth.

3.4 TOPSOIL A. Excavate topsoil only to depth that will preserve topsoil quality. B. Do not mix topsoil with subsoil during stockpiling or spreading. 3.5 SHORING A. Slope, shore, sheet, brace or otherwise support excavations over four (4)

feet deep, Section 31 41 00. B. When soil conditions are unstable, excavations shallower than four (4)

feet deep must also be sloped, supported or shored. 3.6 DEWATERING A. Keep excavation free from surface and ground water. B. If ground water is in the intended construction operations, dewater

excavations. C. If there are no olfactory or visual indications of contamination in the

water, discharge according to requirements of Federal, State or local agency having jurisdiction.

D. If any evidence of contamination in the water, based on olfactory or visual indications, cease excavation work until potential risks are evaluated. During evaluation, handle water as a contaminated material.

E. Pay for damages and costs resulting from dewatering operations.

31 23 16 EXCAVATION

410

3.7 ROADWAY EXCAVATION A. In advance of setting line and grade stakes, clear and grub area of brush,

weeds, vegetation, grass, and debris. Drain all depressions or ruts. B. Roadway excavation is Unclassified Excavation. It includes Portland

cement concrete or bituminous concrete pavement removal and removal of any aggregate base or sub-base material to line and grade established by Drawings or ENGINEER.

3.8 STRUCTURAL AND LANDSCAPE EXCAVATION A. Provide shoring, cribs, cofferdams, caissons, pumping, bailing, draining,

sheathing, bracing, and related items. B. For piling work, coordinate special requirements for piling. Protect

excavation walls. C. If conditions permit, slope excavation sides as excavation progress.

Maintain a safe and clean working area. D. Support excavations. Do not interfere with the bearing of adjacent

foundations, pipelines, etc. 3.9 TRENCH EXCAVATION A. Grade bottom of trenches to provide uniform bearing surface. B. If necessary, make bell holes and depressions required for laying and

joining pipe or box. C. Limit width of trench excavations to the dimensions suitable for worker

access per pipe manufacturer's recommendation. Provide enough space for compaction equipment. Notify ENGINEER if excavation operations exceed any indicated line and grade limits.

D. In roadways and regardless of trench depth, limit length of open trenches to 200 lineal feet day or night. Provide barricading, Section 01 55 26. Protect trenches over night.

3.10 STABILIZATION EXCAVATION A. Perform stabilization excavation as Incidental Excavation.

3.11 AUTHORIZED OVER EXCAVATION A. Over excavation must be permited by ENGINEER to be classified as

authorized over excavation. Volume will be determined by the method of average-end-areas in the original position.

3.12 TOLERANCE A. Grading: Top surface of Subgrade = plus or minus 1 inch.

END OF SECTION

BACKFILLING FOR STRUCTURES 31 23 23

413

SECTION 31 23 23

BACKFILLING FOR STRUCTURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural backfill materials. B. Structural backfilling requirements. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM Standards: D698 Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using

Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). D1557 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)).

D2922 Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

D4832 Preparation and Testing of Soil-Cement Slurry Test Cylinders.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit maximum laboratory dry density and optimum laboratory

moisture content for: 1. Subgrade material, and 2. Each type of fill to be used. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Do not change material sources, or aggregate without ENGINEER's

knowledge. B. Reject backfill material that does not comply with requirements specified

in this Section. C. If requested, submit a written quality control inspections and testing

report describing source and field quality control activities performed by CONTRACTOR and Suppliers.

1.5 STORAGE A. Safely stockpile backfill materials. B. Separate differing materials, prevent mixing, and maintain optimum

moisture content of backfill materials.

31 23 23 BACKFILLING FOR STRUCTURES

414

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS A. Do not place, spread, or roll any backfill material over material that is

damaged by water. Remove and replace damaged material at no additional cost to OWNER.

B. Control erosion. Keep area free of trash and debris. Repair settled, eroded, and rutted areas.

C. Reshape and compact damaged structural section to required density. 1.7 ACCEPTANCE A. General: Native material may be wasted if there is no additional cost to

substitute material acceptable to ENGINEER. B. Material: For material acceptance refer to: 1. Common fill, Section 31 05 13. 2. Aggregate base course, Section 32 11 23. 3. Cement treated fill, Section 31 05 15. C. Lift thickness: One test per Lot. D. Compaction: One test per Lot. Verify compaction using nuclear tests,

ASTM D2922. Density and lot sizes as follows:

Table 1 – Density and Lot Sizes Structure Type Density Proctor Lot Size

Strip Footings 95 Standard Subgrade: 200 linear feet

98 Modified Aggregate base course: 200 linear feet per lift.

Structure Footing excluding strip footings

95 Standard Subgrade: 225 square feet.

98 Modified Aggregate base course: Each 225 square feet per lift

Embankments 95 Standard Fill: 625 square feet per lift Interior Slab on Grade 98 Modified Aggregate base course: 625

square feet

Side of Foundation Walls and Retaining Walls

95 Standard Exterior:

98 Modified Interior

Miscellaneous small structures (e.g. Manholes, drainage boxes, etc.)

95 Standard Subgrade: Each footprint area Fill: Each lift

98 Modified Aggregate base course: Each lift

NOTES (a) Standard proctor, ASTM D698. (b) Modified proctor, ASTM D1557.

E. Flowable Fill Strength: Lot size is one day production with sub-lots of 250 cubic yards or part thereof. Verify strength using cylinders, ASTM D4832.

F. Grade, Cross Slope: Measured at random locations.


415

1.8 WARRANTY A. Repair settlement damage at no additional cost to OWNER.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 BACKFILL MATERIALS A. Common fill, Section 31 05 13. Granular material, CONTRACTOR’s

choice. B. Aggregate base course, Section 32 11 23. Untreated base course. C. Cement treated fill, Section 31 05 15. Use a flowable fill so vibration is

not required. 2.2 WATER A. Make arrangements for sources of water during construction and make

arrangements for delivery of water to site. B. Comply with local Laws and Regulations at no additional cost to

OWNER when securing water from water utility company.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION A. Implement traffic control plan requirements, Section 01 55 26. B. Verify: 1. Backfill material meets gradation requirements. 2. Foundation walls are braced to support surcharge forces imposed by

backfilling operations, areas to be backfilled are free of debris, snow, ice or water.

3. Ground surface is not frozen. C If ground water is in the intended backfill zone, dewater. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect existing trees, shrubs, lawns, structures, fences, roads, sidewalks,

pavings, curb and gutter and other features. B. Protect above or below grade utilities. Contact utility companies to

repair utility damage. Pay all cost of repairs. C. Avoid displacement of and damage to existing installations while

compacting or operating equipment. Do not fill adjacent to structures until excavation is checked by ENGINEER.


416

D. Do not use compaction equipment adjacent to walls or retaining walls that may cause wall to become over-stressed or moved from alignment.

E. Do not disturb or damage foundation perimeter drainage, foundation, damp-proofing, foundation waterproofing and protective cover, or utilities in trenches. Movement of construction machinery over work at any stage of construction is solely at CONTRACTOR's risk.

F. Restore any damaged structure to its original strength and condition. 3.3 LAYOUT A. Identify required line, levels, contours, and datum. B. Stake and flag locations of underground utilities. C. Upon discovery of unknown utility or concealed conditions, notify

ENGINEER. D. Maintain all benchmarks, control monuments and stakes, whether newly

established by surveyor or previously existing. Protect from damage and dislocation.

E. If discrepancy is found between Contract Documents and site, ENGINEER shall make such minor adjustments in the Work as necessary to accomplish the intent of Contract Documents without increasing the Cost of the Work to CONTRACTOR or OWNER.

3.4 SUBGRADE A. Protect Subgrade from desiccation, flooding, and freezing. B. Before backfilling over Subgrade, get ENGINEER's inspection of

subgrade surface preparations. C. If Subgrade is not readily compactable get ENGINEER’s permission to

stabilize the subgrade. 3.5 FOUNDATIONS AND SLABS ON GRADE A. Lift thickness before compaction is eight (8) inches. B. Do not backfill against walls until concrete has obtained 14 days

strength. Backfill against foundation walls simultaneously on each side. C. Fill unauthorized excavations with material acceptable to ENGINEER at

no additional cost to OWNER. D. Do not damage adjacent structures or service lines. E. Where flowable fill is used, use fill that flows easily and vibration for

compaction is not required. 3.6 MODIFIED BACKFILL LAYER METHOD A. Section 33 05 20.


417

3.7 TOLERANCES A. Compaction: Ninety-five (95) percent or ninety eight (98) percent

minimum relative to a standard or modified proctor density, Section 31 23 26.

B. Lift Thickness (before compaction): 1. Eight (8) inches when using riding compaction equipment. 2. Six (6) inches when using hand held compaction equipment. 3. As proven in the modified backfill layer method, Section 33 05 20. C. Cement Treated Fill: Compressive strength targets are 60 psi in 28 days

and 90 psi maximum in 28 days. 3.8 CLEANING A. Remove stockpiles from site. Grade site surface to prevent free standing

surface water. B. Leave borrow areas clean and neat.

END OF SECTION


418

COMPACTION 31 23 26

419

SECTION 31 23 26

COMPACTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Compaction of granular fill materials. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM Standards: D698 Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using

Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). D1557 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3))

D2216 Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock.

D2922 Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

D3017 Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

D3282 Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes.

D3740 Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. A-1 Soil: Defined in ASTM D3282. B. Modified Proctor Density: The maximum laboratory density, as

defined in and determined by ASTM D1557 using procedure A, B or C as applicable.

C. Relative Density (or Relative Compaction): The ratio of field dry density to the maximum laboratory density expressed as a percentage.

D. Standard Proctor Density: The maximum laboratory density, as defined in and determined by ASTM D698 using procedure A, B or C as applicable.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use a soil and rock laboratory that complies with ASTM D3740.

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used

31 23 26 COMPACTION

420

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 COMPACTION A. Moisten or dewater backfill material to obtain optimum moisture for

compaction. B. When no density compactive effort is specified, compact the entire area

to 95 percent and eliminate unstable zones. C. Correct deficient compaction conditions. Replace or repair materials and

damaged facilities. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Perform control testing of materials. Perform additional

testing at no additional cost to OWNER, for 1. Changes in source of materials or proportions requested by

CONTRACTOR, or 2. Failure of materials to meet specification requirements, or 3. Other testing services needed or required by CONTRACTOR. B. Optimum Soil Density: Use ASTM D2216 and the following industry

standards. 1. For A-1 Soils: Method C of ASTM D1557 (Modified Proctor) 2. For All Other Soils: Method C of ASTM D698 (Standard Proctor). C. Field Density: 1. Use ASTM D3017 and test method C of ASTM D2922 for shallow

depth nuclear testing. 2. No density determinations are required on any material containing

more than 65 percent material retained on the number 10 sieve or more than 60 percent material retained on the number 4 sieve. In lieu of reporting densities in such cases, report the sieve analysis to document the material type.

3.3 REPORT A. For each material tested, document the following:

1. Vertical and horizontal location of the test. 2. Optimum laboratory moisture content. 3. Field moisture content. 4. Maximum laboratory dry density. 5. Field density. 6. Percent compaction results. 7. Certification of test results by Independent Testing Agency.

END OF SECTION

EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 31 25 00

421

SECTION 31 25 00

EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Erosion control and slope protection facilities including blankets or

mulches. B. Construction of drainage facilities to protect work area. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit before using: 1. Sample of blanket or geotextile materials. 2. Mulch formula. 3. Grass mixture listing. 4. Plant list. 5. Geotextile manufacturer's certification. B. Application rate of fiber mulches recommended by tackifier

manufacturer. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver seed in original containers with certified germination test results

showing analysis of seed mixture, percentage of pure seed, year of production, and date of packaging. Damaged packages are not acceptable. Store seed free of moisture.

B. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical composition and name of manufacturer.

C. Deliver blanket in original wrapping showing name of manufacturer and product weight.

D. Deliver plant materials immediately before placement. E. Replace plant when original root protection system (burlap bag wrap of

earth ball, plastic container with special plant bedder, etc.) has been broken or displaced before planting.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS A. Riprap: Rock, Section 31 37 00. B. Blankets: Uniform open weave jute, wood fiber, biodegradable or

photodegradable synthetic fiber matting. C. Geotextiles: Section 31 05 19.

31 25 00 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

422

D. Erosion Control Vegetation Mats: Permanent three dimensional mats that allow for revegetation where high water flows are expected.

E. Fiber Mulches: Straw, hay, wood or paper free from weeds and foreign matter detrimental to plant life.

F. Mulch Binder: Vegetable based gel tackifier with growth stimulant. G. Topsoil and Fertilizer: Section 31 05 13 and Section 32 92 00.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove foreign materials, roots, rocks, debris. B. Grade to eliminate rough spots, ponding areas. C. Grade soil to drain perimeter water away from protected areas. D. Temporary controls, Section 01 57 00 as applicable. 3.2 SLOPE PROTECTION BLANKET A. Cover seeded slopes where grade is greater than one (1) vertical to three

(3) horizontal with blanket. Roll down over slopes carefully and loosely without stretching or pulling.

B. Lay blanket smoothly on prepared soil surface. Bury top end of each section in a narrow trench. Leave 24 inches overlap from top roll over bottom roll. Leave 12 inches overlap over adjacent section.

C. Toe-wrap fabric at bottom of slope. D. Staple loosely the outside edges and overlaps. E. In ditches, lay matting in upstream direction. Overlap and staple ends

six (6) inches with upstream section on top. F. If natural drainage water traverses protected or controlled area; construct

a channel or riprap Section 31 37 00. G. Lightly dress slopes with topsoil to ensure close contact between cover

and soil. H. Present alternative methods of protection for approval before starting any

work. 3.3 GEOTEXTILE A. Placement, Section 31 05 19. 3.4 MULCHES A. Apply mulches at the rate necessary. B. When installed with a tackifier, apply at the rate recommended by the

tackifier supplier. 3.5 SURFACE COVER A. Grass, Section 32 92 00. B. Ground cover, Section 32 93 13.

EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 31 25 00

423

3.6 MAINTENANCE A. Maintain surfaces and supply additional topsoil where necessary,

including areas affected by erosion. B. Protect and repair geotextiles, Section 31 05 19. C. Keep surface of soil damp only as necessary for seed germination. D. Apply water slowly so surface of soil will not puddle and crust. E. Replant damaged grass areas showing root growth failure, deterioration,

bare or thin spots, and eroded areas. F. Re-fertilize 60 days after planting. G. Remove weeds that are over three (3) inches high.

END OF SECTION

31 25 00 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

424

CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 1



SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes Concrete Paving.

1. Walks.


1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for general building applications of concrete.2. Section 321373 "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants in expansion and

contraction joints within concrete paving and in joints between concrete paving and asphalt paving or adjacent construction.

3. Section 321726 "Tactile Warning Surfacing" for detectable warning mats.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, and other pozzolans.

B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.



1. Review methods and procedures related to concrete paving, including but not limited to, the following:

a. Concrete mixture design.b. Quality control of concrete materials and concrete paving construction practices.

2. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with concrete paving to attend, including the following:




a. Contractor's superintendent.b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.c. Concrete paving Subcontractor.



B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product, ingredient, or admixture requiring color selection.

C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified ready-mix concrete manufacturer and testing agency.

B. Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer:

1. Cementitious materials.2. Fiber reinforcement.3. Curing compounds.4. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive.5. Joint fillers.

C. Material Test Reports: For each of the following:

1. Aggregates: Include service-record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali-aggregate reactivity.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C94/C94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities" (Quality Control Manual - Section 3, "Plant Certification Checklist").




B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups of full-thickness sections of concrete paving to demonstrate typical joints; surface finish, texture, and color; curing; and standard of workmanship.

2. Build mockups of concrete paving in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, build mockups where directed by Architect and not less than 96 inches by 96 inches. Include full-size detectable warning.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.



A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on concrete paving mixtures.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.

B. Cold-Weather Concrete Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 and the following:

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures.

C. Hot-Weather Concrete Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.




2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap, so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces.

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Materials: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, gray portland cement Type I.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M, Class 4M, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service-record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar paving applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal.2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M.

D. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A.2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type B.3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type D.




4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type F.5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type G.6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C1017/C1017M, Type II.

E. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C94/C94M.

2.4 FIBER REINFORCEMENT

A. Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in decorative concrete paving, complying with ASTM C1116/C1116M, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches long.

2.5 CURING MATERIALS

A. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

B. Water: Potable.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

2.6 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D1752, cork or self-expanding cork in preformed strips.

B. Chemical Surface Retarder: Water-soluble, liquid, set retarder with color dye, for horizontal concrete surface application, capable of temporarily delaying final hardening of concrete to a depth of 1/8 to 1/4 inch.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field experience.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete design mixtures for the trial batch method.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash or Pozzolan: 25 percent.2. Slag Cement: 50 percent.3. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan, and Slag Cement: 50 percent, with fly ash or pozzolan

not exceeding 25 percent.




C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows:

1. Air Content: 5 percent plus or minus 1-1/2 percent for 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

D. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing admixture in concrete as required for placement and workability.2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low

humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

E. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.5 lb/cu. yd. t.

F. Concrete Mixtures: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4500 psi.2. Maximum W/C Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45.3. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C94/C94M and ASTM C1116/C1116M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.

B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.

1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph.

2. Proof-roll with a pneumatic-tired and loaded, 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons.

3. Correct subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."





3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.

3.4 JOINTS

A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated.

1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints.

1. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.

2. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet unless otherwise indicated.2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint.3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if

joint sealant is indicated.4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not

indicated.5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or

clip joint-filler sections together.6. During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or other

temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.




D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate grooving-tool marks on concrete surfaces.

a. Tolerance: Ensure that grooved joints are within 3 inches either way from centers of dowels.

2. Doweled Contraction Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate edging-tool marks on concrete surfaces.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installationand items to be embedded or cast-in.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.

C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.

D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.

F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

G. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies] or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating dowels and joint devices.




H. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.

I. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

3.6 FLOAT FINISHING

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleedwater sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.

1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft-bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.

3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water.b. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears occurring during installation or curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape.




3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period.

3.8 PAVING TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 3/4 inch.2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch.3. Surface: Gap below 10-feet- long; unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch.4. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/2 inch per 12

inches of tie bar.5. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Dowels: 1 inch.6. Vertical Alignment of Dowels: 1/4 inch.7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/4 inch

per 12 inches of dowel.8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches.9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.



B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C172/C172M shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C143/C143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C231/C231M, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064/C1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when it is 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31/C31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.




6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M; test one specimen at seven days and two specimens at 28 days.

a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days.

C. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect.

G. Concrete paving will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

I. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect.

B. Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory paving areas with portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.




D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.


CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 321373 - 1



SECTION 321373 - CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cold-applied joint sealants.2. Hot-applied joint sealants.3. Joint-sealant backer materials.4. Primers.





B. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

C. Paving-Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.3. Joint-sealant formulation.4. Joint-sealant color.



B. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory.





A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

2. When joint substrates are wet.3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated.4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2.2 COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM D5893/D5893M, Type NS.

B. Single-Component, Self-Leveling, Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM D5893/D5893M, Type SL.

C. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane, Elastomeric Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T.

D. Single Component, Pourable, Urethane, Elastomeric Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T.

E. Multicomponent, Pourable, Urethane, Elastomeric Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T.




2.3 HOT-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Hot-Applied, Single-Component Joint Sealant: ASTM D6690, Type I.

B. Hot-Applied, Single-Component Joint Sealant: ASTM D6690, Type I or Type II.

C. Hot-Applied, Single-Component Joint Sealant: ASTM D6690, Type I, II, or III.

2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS

A. Joint-Sealant Backer Materials: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Round Backer Rods for Cold- and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D5249, Type 1, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.

2.5 PRIMERS

A. Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Before installing joint sealants, clean out joints immediately to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.




3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Joint-Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions.

C. Install joint-sealant backings to support joint sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint-sealant backings.2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint-sealant backings.3. Remove absorbent joint-sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application

and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install joint sealants immediately following backing installation, using proven techniques that comply with the following:

1. Place joint sealants so they fully contact joint substrates.2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Joint Sealants: Immediately after joint-sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to the following requirements to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint:

1. Remove excess joint sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and that do

not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

F. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.


A. Clean off excess joint sealant as the Work progresses, by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturers.

B. Protect joint sealants, during and after curing period, from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations in repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.




3.5 PAVING-JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Joints within concrete paving.

1. Joint Location:

a. Expansion and isolation joints in concrete paving.b. Contraction joints in concrete paving.c. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Single-component, nonsag, silicone joint sealant.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Joints within concrete paving and between concrete and asphalt paving.

1. Joint Location:

a. Joints between concrete and asphalt paving.b. Joints between concrete curbs and asphalt paving.c. Other joints as indicated.

2. Joint Sealant: Hot-applied, single-component joint sealant.3. Joint-Sealant Color: Manufacturer's standard.


TACTILE WARNING SURFACING 321726 - 1



SECTION 321726 - TACTILE WARNING SURFACING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Detectable warning mats.


1. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for concrete walkways serving as substrates for tactile warning surfacing.



B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish requiring color selection.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of tactile warning surface, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated, showing edge condition, truncated-dome pattern, texture, color, and cross section; with fasteners and anchors.


A. Maintenance Data: For tactile warning surfacing, to include in maintenance manuals.










A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver work damaged by frost or freezing.

B. Weather Limitations for Adhesive Application:

1. Apply adhesive only when ambient temperature is above 50 deg F and when temperature has not been below 35 deg F for 12 hours immediately before application. Do not apply when substrate is wet or contains excess moisture.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of tactile warning surfaces that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering and wear.b. Separation or delamination of materials and components.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TACTILE WARNING SURFACING, GENERAL

A. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for tactile warning surfaces.

1. For tactile warning surfaces composed of multiple units, provide units that when installed provide consistent side-to-side and end-to-end dome spacing that complies with requirements.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of tactile warning surfacing, joint material, setting material, anchor, and fastener from single source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.




2.2

2.3 DETECTABLE WARNING MATS

A. Surface-Applied Detectable Warning Mats: Accessible truncated-dome detectable warning resilient mats, UV resistant, manufactured for adhering to existing concrete walkway surfaces, with slip-resistant surface treatment on domes, field of mat, and beveled outside edges.

1. Material: Modified rubber compound, UV resistant.2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.3. Shapes and Sizes:

a. Rectangular panel, 24 by 60 inches.

4. Dome Spacing and Configuration: Manufacturer's standard compliant spacing, in manufacturer's standard pattern.

5. Mounting: Adhered to pavement surface with adhesive and fastened with fasteners.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of tactile warning surfaces, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:

1. Furnish Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use.2. Fastener Heads: For nonstructural connections, use flathead or oval countersunk screws

and bolts with tamper-resistant heads, colored to match tile.

B. Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer for adhering tactile warning surfacing unit to pavement.

C. Sealant: As recommended by manufacturer for sealing perimeter of tactile warning surfacing unit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that pavement is in suitable condition to begin installation according to manufacturer's written instructions. Verify that installation of tactile warning surfacing will comply with accessibility requirements upon completion.





3.2 INSTALLATION OF TACTILE WARNING SURFACING

A. General: Prepare substrate and install tactile warning surfacing according to manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

B. Place tactile warning surfacing units in dimensions and orientation indicated. Comply with location requirements of AASHTO MP 12.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF DETECTABLE WARNING MATS

A. Lay out detectable warning mats as indicated and mark concrete pavement at edges of mats.

B. Prepare existing paving surface by grinding and cleaning as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Apply adhesive to back of mat in amounts and pattern recommended by manufacturer, and set mat in place. Firmly seat mat in adhesive bed, eliminating air pockets and establishing full adhesion to pavement. If necessary, temporarily apply weight to mat to ensure full contact with adhesive.

D. Install anchor devices through face of mat and into pavement using anchors located as recommended by manufacturer. Set heads of anchors flush with mat surface.

E. Mask mat perimeter and adjacent concrete, and apply sealant in continuous bead around perimeter of mat.

F. Remove masking, adhesive, excess sealant, and soil from exposed surfaces of detectable warning mat and surrounding concrete pavement using cleaning agents recommended in writing by manufacturer.

G. Protect installed mat from traffic until adhesive has set.


A. Remove and replace tactile warning surfacing that is broken or damaged or does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect. Replace using tactile warning surfacing installation methods acceptable to Architect.

B. Protect tactile warning surfacing from damage and maintain free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material.


PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400 - 1



SECTION 328400 - PLANTING IRRIGATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS UNIVERSITY OF UTAH SUPPLEMENT Chapter 4.0 Landscape and Irrigation Standards, August 29, 2018.

C. DFCM Design Requirements 011719, Chapter 4.0, Landscape and Irrigation Standards.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Piping.2. Pressure-reducing valves.3. Automatic control valves.4. Automatic drain valves.5. Miscellaneous piping specialties.6. Sprinklers.7. Quick couplers.8. Drip irrigation specialties.9. Boxes for automatic control valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. For irrigation related definitions, refer to the following website by the Irrigation.

1. Association: http://www.irrigation.org/.

B. Circuit Piping: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, specialties, and drain valves. Piping is under pressure during flow.

C. Drain Piping: Downstream from circuit-piping drain valves. Piping is not under pressure.

D. ET Controllers: EvapoTranspiration Controllers. Irrigation controllers which use some method of weather based adjustment of irrigation. These adjusting methods include use of historical monthly averages of ET; broadcasting of ET measurements; or use of on-site sensors to track ET.

http://www.irrigation.org/




E. Main Piping: Downstream from point of connection to water distribution piping to, and including, control valves. Piping is under water-distribution-system pressure.

F. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.


A. Irrigation zone control shall be automatic operation with existing controller and with new automatic control valves.

B. Location of Sprinklers and Specialties: Design location is approximate. Make minor adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards. Maintain 100 percent irrigation coverage of areas indicated.

1. Available land records indicate the following soil conditions:

a. Type: Medium.

C. Minimum Working Pressures: The following are minimum pressure requirements for piping, valves, and specialties unless otherwise indicated:

1. Irrigation Main Piping: 200 psig.2. Circuit Piping: 150 psig.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Coordination Drawings: Irrigation systems, drawn to scale, on which components are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved. Also include adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

C. Zoning Chart: Show each irrigation zone and its control valve.

D. Controller Timing Schedule: Indicate timing settings for each automatic controller zone.

E. Field quality-control reports.





A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinklers and automatic control valves to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Spray Sprinklers: Equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each type and size indicated, but no fewer than 10 units.

2. Bubblers: Equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but no fewer than 10 units.

3. Emitters: Equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but no fewer than 50 units.

4. Drip-Tube System Tubing: Equal to 10 percent of total length installed for each type and size indicated, but not less than 100 feet.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers that include a certified irrigation contractor with current certification from The Irrigation Association to be included in the Contractor’s work crew as a direct employee of the Contractor. The CIC will be required to meet weekly with the Irrigation Foreman of the University Landscape Maintenance Department to walk thework site and review the progress of the Work.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


A. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.


A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Owner's written permission.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Comply with requirements in the piping schedule for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

B. Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Standard Weight, Type E, Grade B.

1. Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A733, made of ASTM A53/A53M or ASTM A106/A106M, Standard Weight, seamless-steel pipe with threaded ends.

2. Galvanized, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.3. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-

socket, metal-to-metal, bronze seating surface, and female threaded ends.4. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125.

C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, PVC 1120 compound, Schedules 40 and 80.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D2466, Schedules 40 and 80.2. PVC Threaded Fittings: ASTM D2464, Schedule 80.3. PVC Socket Unions: Construction similar to MSS SP-107, except both headpiece and

tailpiece shall be PVC with socket ends.

D. PVC Pipe, Pressure Rated: ASTM D2241, PVC 1120 compound, SDR 21 and SDR 26.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D2467, Schedule 80.2. PVC Socket Unions: Construction similar to MSS SP-107, except both headpiece and

tailpiece shall be PVC with socket or threaded ends.

2.2 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D2564. Include primer according to ASTM F656.

2.3 MANUAL VALVES

A. Plastic Ball Valves:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-122.b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.c. Body Material: PVC.d. Type: Union.e. End Connections: Socket or threaded.f. Port: Full.




2.4 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES

A. Plastic, Automatic Control Valves:

1. Description: Molded-plastic body, normally closed, diaphragm type with manual-flow adjustment, and operated by 24-V ac solenoid.

2.5 AUTOMATIC DRAIN VALVES

A. Description: Spring-loaded-ball type of corrosion-resistant construction and designed to open for drainage if line pressure drops below 2-1/2 to 3 psig.

2.6 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

B. Transition Couplings:

1. Description: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling for underground pressure piping.

2.7 SPRINKLERS

A. General Requirements: Designed for uniform coverage over entire spray area indicated at available water pressure.

B. Plastic, Pop-up Spray Sprinklers:

1. Description:

a. Body Material: ABS.b. Nozzle: Brass.c. Retraction Spring: Stainless steel.d. Internal Parts: Corrosion resistant.e. Pattern: Fixed, with flow adjustment.

2. Capacities and Characteristics:

a. Nozzle: Brass.b. Flow: 1.69 gpm.c. Pop-up Height: 4 inches aboveground to nozzle.d. Arc: Full, Half, or Quarter arc circle.e. Radius: 14 feet.f. Inlet: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4.




2.8 QUICK COUPLERS

A. Description: Factory-fabricated, bronze or brass, two-piece assembly. Include coupler water-seal valve; removable upper body with spring-loaded or weighted, rubber-covered cap; hose swivel with ASME B1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH threads for garden hose on outlet; and operating key.

1. Locking-Top Option: Vandal-resistant locking feature. Include two matching key(s).

2.9 DRIP IRRIGATION SPECIALTIES

A. Drip Tubes with Direct-Attached Emitters:

1. Tubing: Flexible PE or PVC with plugged end.2. Emitters: Devices to deliver water at approximately 20 psig.

a. Body Material: PE or vinyl, with flow control.b. Mounting: Inserted into tubing at set intervals.

3. Capacities and Characteristics:

a. Tubing Size: NPS 1/2.b. Emitter Spacing: 12 inches.c. Emitter Flow: 1/2 gph.

B. Application Pressure Regulators: Brass or plastic housing, NPS 3/4, with corrosion-resistant internal parts; capable of controlling outlet pressure to approximately 20 psig.

C. Filter Units: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant internal parts; of size and capacity required for devices downstream from unit.

D. Air Relief Valves: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant internal parts.

E. Vacuum Relief Valves: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant internal parts.

2.10 CONTROLLERS

A. Connect to existing irrigation controller.

2.11 BOXES FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES

A. Plastic Boxes:

1. Description: Box and cover, with open bottom and openings for piping; designed for installing flush with grade.

a. Size: As required for valves and service.b. Shape: Rectangular.c. Sidewall Material: PE, ABS, or FRP.




d. Cover Material: PE, ABS, or FRP.

1) Lettering: " IRRIGATION."

B. Drainage Backfill: Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4 inch minimum to 3 inches maximum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

B. Install warning tape directly above pressure piping, 12 inches below finished grades, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavement and slabs.

C. Drain Pockets: Excavate to sizes indicated. Backfill with cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4 to 3 inches, to 12 inches below grade. Cover gravel or crushed stone with sheet of asphalt-saturated felt and backfill remainder with excavated material.

D. Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the following:

1. Irrigation Main Piping: Minimum depth of 36 inches below finished grade, or not less than 18 inches below average local frost depth, whichever is deeper.

2. Circuit Piping: 12 inches.3. Drain Piping: 12 inches.4. Sleeves: 24 inches.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Set stakes to identify locations of proposed irrigation system. Obtain Architect's approval before excavation.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Location and Arrangement: Drawings indicate location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping at minimum uniform slope of 0.5 percent down toward drain valves.

C. Install piping free of sags and bends.

D. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.

E. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.




F. Install unions adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components with NPS 2 or smaller pipe connection.

G. Install flanges adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components with NPS 2-1/2 or larger pipe connection.

H. Install underground thermoplastic piping according to ASTM D2774.

I. Install expansion loops in control-valve boxes for plastic piping.

J. Lay piping on solid subbase, uniformly sloped without humps or depressions.

K. Install PVC piping in dry weather when temperature is above 40 deg F. Allow joints to cure at least 24 hours at temperatures above 40 deg F before testing.

L. Install piping in sleeves under parking lots, roadways, and sidewalks.

M. Install sleeves made of Schedule 40 PVC pipe and socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

N. Install transition fittings for plastic-to-metal pipe connections according to the following:

1. Underground Piping:

a. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings.b. NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA transition couplings.

2. Piping in Control-Valve Boxes:

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Dielectric union.b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Dielectric flange.c. NPS 5 and Larger: Dielectric flange kit.

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.




D. Flanged Joints: Select rubber gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

E. PVC Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number, ASTM D1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D2855.

3. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D2855.

3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Install in boxes for automatic control valves or aboveground between shutoff valves. Install full-size valved bypass.

B. Drain Valves: Install in underground piping in boxes for automatic control valves.

3.6 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers after hydrostatic test is completed.

B. Install sprinklers at manufacturer's recommended heights.

C. Locate part-circle sprinklers to maintain a minimum distance of 4 inches from walls and 2 inches from other boundaries unless otherwise indicated.

3.7 DRIP IRRIGATION SPECIALTY INSTALLATION

A. Install drip tubes with direct-attached emitters on ground.

B. Install application pressure regulators and filter units in piping near device being protected, and in control-valve boxes.

C. Install air relief valves and vacuum relief valves in piping, and in control-valve boxes.

3.8 AUTOMATIC IRRIGATION-CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install control cable in same trench as irrigation piping and at least 2 inches below or beside piping. Provide conductors of size not smaller than recommended by controller manufacturer. Install cable in separate sleeve under paved areas.




3.9 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221113 "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for water supply from exterior water service piping, water meters, protective enclosures, and backflow preventers. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment, valves, and devices to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect wiring between controllers and automatic control valves.

3.10 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplates and signs on each automatic controller.

1. Text: In addition to identifying unit, distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.

C. Warning Tapes: Arrange for installation of continuous, underground, detectable warning tapes over underground piping during backfilling of trenches. See Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for warning tapes.


A. Construction Inspection and Post-Construction Monitoring

1. During construction, site inspection of the landscaping may be performed by the DFCM, the local institution or agency.

2. During construction a mainline pressure and leak test will be conducted.3. Following construction an inspection shall be scheduled with the DFCM to verify

compliance with the approved landscape and irrigation plans. A Certificate of Substantial Completion Form shall be completed by the Contractor or Landscape Architect and submitted to the DFCM.

4. Following construction a Water Use Efficiency Review (Audit) will be conducted by a certified Landscape Irrigation Auditor. The auditor shall be independent of the contractor, design firm and owner/developer of the project. The water performance audit will verify that the irrigation system complies with the minimum standards required by this ordinance. The auditor shall furnish a certificate to the DFCM, Landscape Architect, and installer certifying compliance with the minimum distribution requirements and an irrigation schedule.




5. The DFCM reserves the right to perform site inspections at any time before, during or after the irrigation system and landscape installation, and to require corrective measures if requirements of this guideline are not satisfied.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate controllers and automatic control valves to confirm proper system operation.

3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Any irrigation product will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.12 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.2. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal.

3.13 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate at rated operating pressure required for each sprinkler circuit.

B. Adjust sprinklers and devices, except those intended to be mounted aboveground, so they will be flush with, or not more than 1/2 inch above, finish grade.

3.14 CLEANING

A. Flush dirt and debris from piping before installing sprinklers and other devices.

3.15 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic control valves.




3.16 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

B. Piping in control-valve boxes and aboveground may be joined with flanges or unions instead of joints indicated.

C. Underground irrigation main piping, NPS 4 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

D. Circuit piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.

E. Underground Branches and Offsets at Sprinklers and Devices: Schedule 80, PVC pipe; threaded PVC fittings; and threaded joints.

1. Option: Plastic swing-joint assemblies, with offsets for flexible joints, manufactured for this application.

F. Drain piping shall be the following:

1. Schedule 40, PVC pipe and socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.

3.17 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drain Valves:

1. Plastic ball valve.


SOIL PREPARATION 329113 - 1



SECTION 329113 - SOIL PREPARATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes planting soils and layered soil assemblies specified by composition of the mixes.


1. Section 329200 "Turf and Grasses" for placing planting soil for turf and grasses.2. Section 329300 "Plants" for placing planting soil for plantings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AAPFCO: Association of American Plant Food Control Officials.

B. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. This can be amended or unamended soil as indicated.

C. CEC: Cation exchange capacity.

D. Compost: The product resulting from the controlled biological decomposition of organic material that has been sanitized through the generation of heat and stabilized to the point that it is beneficial to plant growth.

E. Duff Layer: A surface layer of soil, typical of forested areas, that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus.

F. Imported Soil: Soil that is transported to Project site for use.

G. Layered Soil Assembly: A designed series of planting soils, layered on each other, that together produce an environment for plant growth.

H. Manufactured Soil: Soil produced by blending soils, sand, stabilized organic soil amendments, and other materials to produce planting soil.

I. NAPT: North American Proficiency Testing Program. An SSSA program to assist soil-, plant-, and water-testing laboratories through interlaboratory sample exchanges and statistical evaluation of analytical data.




J. Organic Matter: The total of organic materials in soil exclusive of undecayed plant and animal tissues, their partial decomposition products, and the soil biomass; also called "humus" or "soil organic matter."

K. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified as specified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

L. RCRA Metals: Hazardous metals identified by the EPA under the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act.

M. SSSA: Soil Science Society of America.

N. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

O. Subsoil: Soil beneath the level of subgrade; soil beneath the topsoil layers of a naturally occurring soil profile, typified by less than 1 percent organic matter and few soil organisms.

P. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile. In undisturbed areas, surface soil is typically called "topsoil"; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

Q. USCC: U.S. Composting Council.





1. Include recommendations for application and use.2. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements.3. Include sieve analyses for aggregate materials.4. Material Certificates: For each type of imported soil and soil amendment and fertilizer

before delivery to the site, according to the following:

a. Manufacturer's qualified testing agency's certified analysis of standard products.b. Analysis of fertilizers, by a qualified testing agency, made according to AAPFCO

methods for testing and labeling and according to AAPFCO's SUIP #25.c. Analysis of nonstandard materials, by a qualified testing agency, made according

to SSSA methods, where applicable.




B. Samples: For each bulk-supplied material, 1-quart volume of each in sealed containers labeled with content, source, and date obtained. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of composition, color, and texture.


A. Qualification Data: For each testing agency.

B. Preconstruction Test Reports: For preconstruction soil analyses specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent, state-operated, or university-operated laboratory; experienced in soil science, soil testing, and plant nutrition; with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated; and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.

1. Multiple Laboratories: At Contractor's option, work may be divided among qualified testing laboratories specializing in physical testing, chemical testing, and fertility testing.


A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction soil analyses on imported soil.

1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when laboratory samples will be taken.

B. Preconstruction Soil Analyses: For each unamended soil type, perform testing on soil samples and furnish soil analysis and a written report containing soil-amendment and fertilizer recommendations by a qualified testing agency performing the testing according to "Soil-Sampling Requirements" and "Testing Requirements" articles.

1. Have testing agency identify and label samples and test reports according to sample collection and labeling requirements.

1.9 SOIL-SAMPLING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Extract soil samples according to requirements in this article.




B. Sample Collection and Labeling: Have samples taken and labeled by Contractor in presence of Architect under the direction of the testing agency.

1. Number and Location of Samples: Minimum of three representative soil samples from varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for landscaping purposes.

2. Procedures and Depth of Samples: According to USDA-NRCS's "Field Book for Describing and Sampling Soils."

3. Division of Samples: Split each sample into two, equal parts. Send half to the testing agency and half to Owner for its records.

4. Labeling: Label each sample with the date, location keyed to a site plan or other location system, visible soil condition, and sampling depth.

1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Perform tests on soil samples according to requirements in this article.

B. Physical Testing:

1. Soil Texture: Soil-particle, size-distribution analysis by one of the following methods according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods":

a. Sieving Method: Report sand-gradation percentages for very coarse, coarse, medium, fine, and very fine sand; and fragment-gradation (gravel) percentages for fine, medium, and coarse fragments; according to USDA sand and fragment sizes.

b. Hydrometer Method: Report percentages of sand, silt, and clay.

2. Total Porosity: Calculate using particle density and bulk density according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods."

3. Water Retention: According to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods."

4. Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity: According to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods"; at 85% compaction according to ASTM D698 (Standard Proctor).

C. Chemical Testing:

1. CEC: Analysis by sodium saturation at pH 7 according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 3- Chemical Methods."

2. Clay Mineralogy: Analysis and estimated percentage of expandable clay minerals using CEC by ammonium saturation at pH 7 according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1- Physical and Mineralogical Methods."

3. Metals Hazardous to Human Health: Test for presence and quantities of RCRA metals including aluminum, arsenic, barium, copper, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If RCRA metals are present, include recommendations for corrective action.

4. Phytotoxicity: Test for plant-available concentrations of phytotoxic minerals including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chlorides, chromium, cobalt, copper, lead, lithium, mercury, nickel, selenium, silver, sodium, strontium, tin, titanium, vanadium, and zinc.




D. Fertility Testing: Soil-fertility analysis according to standard laboratory protocol of SSSA NAPT WERA-103, including the following:

1. Percentage of organic matter.2. CEC, calcium percent of CEC, and magnesium percent of CEC.3. Soil reaction (acidity/alkalinity pH value).4. Buffered acidity or alkalinity.5. Nitrogen ppm.6. Phosphorous ppm.7. Potassium ppm.8. Manganese ppm.9. Manganese-availability ppm.10. Zinc ppm.11. Zinc availability ppm.12. Copper ppm.13. Sodium ppm and sodium absorption ratio.14. Soluble-salts ppm.15. Presence and quantities of problem materials including salts and metals cited in the

Standard protocol. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action.

16. Other deleterious materials, including their characteristics and content of each.

E. Organic-Matter Content: Analysis using loss-by-ignition method according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 3- Chemical Methods."

F. Recommendations: Based on the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants indicated. Include, at a minimum, recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium fertilization, and for micronutrients.

1. Fertilizers and Soil Amendment Rates: State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft. for 6-inchdepth of soil.

2. Soil Reaction: State the recommended liming rates for raising pH or sulfur for lowering pH according to the buffered acidity or buffered alkalinity in weight per 1000 sq. ft. for 6-inchdepth of soil.


A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and compliance with state and Federal laws if applicable.

B. Bulk Materials:

1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants.

2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.




3. Do not move or handle materials when they are wet or frozen.4. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers and soil amendments with appropriate

certificates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLANTING SOILS SPECIFIED BY COMPOSITION

A. General: Soil amendments, fertilizers, and rates of application specified in this article are guidelines that may need revision based on testing laboratory's recommendations after preconstruction soil analyses are performed.

B. Planting-Soil Type: Imported, naturally formed soil from off-site sources and consisting of loam soil according to USDA textures; and modified to produce viable planting soil.

1. Sources: Take imported, unamended soil from sources that are naturally well-drained sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep, not from agricultural land, bogs, or marshes; and that do not contain undesirable organisms; disease-causing plant pathogens; or obnoxious weeds and invasive plants including, but not limited to, quackgrass, Johnsongrass, poison ivy, nutsedge, nimblewill, Canada thistle, bindweed, bentgrass, wild garlic, ground ivy, perennial sorrel, and bromegrass.

2. Additional Properties of Imported Soil before Amending: Soil reaction of pH 6 to 7 and minimum of 2 percent organic-matter content, friable, and with sufficient structure to give good tilth and aeration.

3. Unacceptable Properties: Clean soil of the following:

a. Unacceptable Materials: Concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and other extraneous materials that are harmful to plant growth.

b. Unsuitable Materials: Stones, roots, plants, sod, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse sand that exceed a combined maximum of 8 percent by dry weight of the imported soil.

c. Large Materials: Stones, clods, roots, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse sand exceeding 2 inches in any dimension.

4. Amended Soil Composition: Blend imported, unamended soil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil:

a. Ratio of Loose Compost to Soil: 1:3 by volume.

2.2 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter produced by composting feedstock, and bearing USCC's "Seal of Testing Assurance," and as follows:




1. Feedstock: May include animal waste.2. Reaction: pH of 5.5 to 8. 3. Soluble-Salt Concentration: Less than 4 dS/m.4. Moisture Content: 35 to 55 percent by weight.5. Organic-Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight.6. Particle Size: Minimum of 98 percent passing through a 1-inch sieve.

B. Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or of granular texture with 100 percent passing through a 1/2-inch sieve, a pH of 3.4 to 4.8, and a soluble-salt content measured by electrical conductivity of maximum 5 dS/m.

C. Wood Derivatives: Shredded and composted, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of uniform texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.

1. Partially Decomposed Wood Derivatives: In lieu of shredded and composted wood derivatives, mix shredded and partially decomposed wood derivatives with ammonium nitrate at a minimum rate of 0.15 lb/cu. ft. of loose sawdust or ground bark, or with ammonium sulfate at a minimum rate of 0.25 lb/cu. ft. of loose sawdust or ground bark.

D. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, debris, and material harmful to plant growth.

2.3 FERTILIZERS

A. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid.

B. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.

C. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified testing agency.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Place planting soil and fertilizers according to requirements in other Specification Sections.

B. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in planting soil.

C. Proceed with placement only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PLACING MANUFACTURED PLANTING SOIL OVER EXPOSED SUBGRADE

A. General: Apply manufactured soil on-site in its final, blended condition. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

B. Subgrade Preparation: Till subgrade to a minimum depth of 8 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

C. Application: Spread planting soil to total depth of 4 inches, but not less than required to meet finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

1. Lifts: Apply planting soil in lifts not exceeding 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

D. Compaction: Compact each lift of planting soil to 75 to 82 percent of maximum Standard Proctor density according to ASTM D698.

E. Finish Grading: Grade planting soil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

3.3 APPLYING COMPOST TO SURFACE OF PLANTING SOIL

A. Application: Apply 4 inches of compost to surface of in-place planting soil. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

B. Finish Grading: Grade surface to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.






B. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Compaction: Test planting-soil compaction after placing each lift and at completion using a densitometer or soil-compaction meter calibrated to a reference test value based on laboratory testing according to ASTM D698. Space tests at no less than one for each 1000 sq. ft. of in-place soil or part thereof.

C. Soil will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

E. Label each sample and test report with the date, location keyed to a site plan or other location system, visible conditions when and where sample was taken, and sampling depth.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protection Zone: Identify protection zones according to Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

B. Protect areas of in-place soil from additional compaction, disturbance, and contamination. Prohibit the following practices within these areas except as required to perform planting operations:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.2. Parking vehicles or equipment.3. Vehicle traffic.4. Foot traffic.5. Erection of sheds or structures.6. Impoundment of water.7. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.

C. If planting soil or subgrade is overcompacted, disturbed, or contaminated by foreign or deleterious materials or liquids, remove the planting soil and contamination; restore the subgrade as directed by Architect and replace contaminated planting soil with new planting soil.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Protect areas adjacent to planting-soil preparation and placement areas from contamination. Keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition.




B. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable materials, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property unless otherwise indicated.

1. Dispose of excess subsoil and unsuitable materials on-site where directed by Owner.


TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 1



SECTION 329200 - TURF AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sodding.


1. Section 329300 "Plants" for trees, shrubs, ground covers, and other plants as well as border edgings and mow strips.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

B. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. They also include substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.

C. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. Pests include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

D. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. See Section 329113 "Soil Preparation" and drawing designations for planting soils.

E. Subgrade: The surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.







A. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer.

B. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or mixture, stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging.

1. Certification of each seed mixture for turfgrass sod. Include identification of source and name and telephone number of supplier.

C. Product Certificates: For fertilizers, from manufacturer.

D. Pesticides and Herbicides: Product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to Project.


A. Maintenance Data: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of turf during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful turf establishment.

1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the National Association of Landscape Professionals or AmericanHort.

2. Experience: Five years' experience in turf installation in addition to requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

4. Personnel Certifications: Installer's field supervisor shall have certification in one of the following categories from the National Association of Landscape Professionals:

a. Landscape Industry Certified Technician - Exterior.b. Landscape Industry Certified Lawn Care Manager.c. Landscape Industry Certified Lawn Care Technician.

5. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.





A. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" sections in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod within 24 hours of harvesting and in time for planting promptly. Protect sod from breakage and drying.

B. Bulk Materials:


2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials; discharge of soil-bearing water runoff; and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.

3. Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with appropriate certificates.


A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with initial maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of planting completion.

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TURFGRASS SOD

A. Turfgrass Sod: Number 1 Quality/Premium, including limitations on thatch, weeds, diseases, nematodes, and insects, complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture that is strongly rooted and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted.

B. Turfgrass Species, Warm-Season Grass: Turf-type tall fescue (Festuca arundinacea), shade tolerant blend and Kentucky Blue Grass (Poa pratensis).

C. Turfgrass Species, Cool-Season Grass: Sod of grass species as follows, with not less than 85 percent germination, not less than 95 percent pure seed, and not more than 0.5 percent weed seed:

1. Full Sun: Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis), a minimum of three cultivars.




2. Sun and Partial Shade: Proportioned by weight as follows:

a. 50 percent Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis).b. 30 percent chewings red fescue (Festuca rubra variety).c. 10 percent perennial ryegrass (Lolium perenne).d. 10 percent redtop (Agrostis alba).

3. Shade: Proportioned by weight as follows:

a. 50 percent chewings red fescue (Festuca rubra variety).b. 35 percent rough bluegrass (Poa trivialis).c. 15 percent redtop (Agrostis alba).

2.2 FERTILIZERS

A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition:

a. Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing laboratory.

B. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition:

a. 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight.b. Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports

from a qualified soil-testing laboratory.

2.3 PESTICIDES

A. General: Pesticide, registered and approved by the EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer.

C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated.




2.4 EROSION-CONTROL MATERIALS

A. Erosion-Control Blankets: Biodegradable wood excelsior, straw, or coconut-fiber mat enclosed in a photodegradable plastic mesh. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches long.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting installation and performance of the Work.

1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area.

2. Suspend planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.

3. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or which is dusty.


C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures; utilities; sidewalks; pavements; and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations.

1. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them.

B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

3.3 TURF AREA PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare planting area for soil placement and mix planting soil according to Section 329113 "Soil Preparation."

B. Placing Planting Soil: Place manufactured planting soil over exposed subgrade.

1. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.




C. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

D. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

3.4 SODDING

A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting unless a suitable preservation method is accepted by Architect prior to delivery time. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy.

B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to soil or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with soil, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass.

1. Lay sod across slopes exceeding 1:3.2. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs spaced as recommended by sod

manufacturer but not less than two anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage.

C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches below sod.

3.5 TURF MAINTENANCE

A. General: Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation.

1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.

2. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement.

3. Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards.

B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and turf-watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches.

1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas.

2. Water turf with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch per week unless rainfall precipitation is adequate.




C. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than one-third of grass height. Remove no more than one-third of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain the following grass height:

1. Mow Kentucky bluegrass and turf-type tall fescue (Festuca arundinacea) to a height of 1-1/2 to 2 inches.

D. Turf Postfertilization: Apply slow-release fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry.

1. Use fertilizer that provides actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. to turf area.

3.6 SATISFACTORY TURF

A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect:

1. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities.

B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements, and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory.

3.7 PESTICIDE APPLICATION

A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed.

B. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Nonselective): Apply only as necessary to treat already-germinated weeds and according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.8 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.

B. Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

C. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after plantings are established.

D. Remove nondegradable erosion-control measures after grass establishment period.





A. Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in "Turf Maintenance" Article. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established, but for not less than the following periods:

1. Sodded Turf: 30 days from date of planting completion.


PLANTS 329300 - 1



SECTION 329300 - PLANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Plants.2. Tree stabilization.3. Landscape edgings.


1. Section 329200 "Turf and Grasses" for turf (lawn) and meadow planting, hydroseeding, and erosion-control materials.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.

B. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they were grown, with a ball size not less than sizes indicated; wrapped with burlap, tied, rigidly supported, and drum laced with twine with the root flare visible at the surface of the ball as recommended by ANSI Z60.1.

C. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants grown in a container, with a well-established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.

D. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

E. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. They also include substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. Some sources classify herbicides separately from pesticides.

PLANTS 329300 - 2



F. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. Pests include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

G. Planting Area: Areas to be planted.

H. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. See Section 329113 "Soil Preparation" for drawing designations for planting soils.

I. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs, vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation.

J. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk.

K. Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of trees below the soil surface.

L. Subgrade: The surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordination with Turf Areas (Lawns): Plant trees, shrubs, and other plants after finish grades are established and before planting turf areas unless otherwise indicated.

1. When planting trees, shrubs, and other plants after planting turf areas, protect turf areas, and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations.





1. Plant Materials: Include quantities, sizes, quality, and sources for plant materials.2. Plant Photographs: Include color photographs in digital format of each required species

and size of plant material as it will be furnished to Project. Take photographs from an angle depicting true size and condition of the typical plant to be furnished. Include a scale rod or other measuring device in each photograph. For species where more than 20 plants are required, include a minimum of three photographs showing the average plant, the best quality plant, and the worst quality plant to be furnished. Identify each photograph with the full scientific name of the plant, plant size, and name of the growing nursery.

PLANTS 329300 - 3



B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following:

1. Trees and Shrubs: Three Samples of each variety and size delivered to site for review. Maintain approved Samples on-site as a standard for comparison.

2. Compost Mulch: 1-pint volume of each organic mulch required; in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage of weight and source of mulch. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of color, texture, and organic makeup.

3. Weed Control Barrier: 12 by 12 inches.4. Edging Materials and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard size, to verify color selected.


A. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer. Include list of similar projects completed by Installer demonstrating Installer's capabilities and experience. Include project names, addresses, and year completed, and include names and addresses of owners' contact persons.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and complying with the following:

1. Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard products.2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods

established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable.

C. Pesticides and Herbicides: Product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to Project.

D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of plants during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of plants.

1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the National Association of Landscape Professionals or AmericanHort.

2. Experience: Five years' experience in landscape installation in addition to requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

PLANTS 329300 - 4



4. Personnel Certifications: Installer's personnel assigned to the Work shall have certification in one of the following categories from the National Association of Landscape Professionals:

a. Landscape Industry Certified Technician - Exterior.b. Landscape Industry Certified Interior.c. Landscape Industry Certified Horticultural Technician.

5. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.

B. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1.

C. Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1. Do not prune to obtain required sizes.

1. Trees and Shrubs: Measure with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Take height measurements from or near the top of the root flare for field-grown stock and container-grown stock. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip to tip. Take caliper measurements 6 inches above the root flare for trees up to 4-inch caliper size, and 12 inches above the root flare for larger sizes.

2. Other Plants: Measure with stems, petioles, and foliage in their normal position.

D. Plant Material Observation: Architect may observe plant material either at place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, cultivar, size, and quality. Architect may also observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, pests, disease symptoms, injuries, and latent defects and may reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site.

1. Notify Architect of sources of planting materials seven days in advance of delivery to site.


A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of compliance with state and Federal laws if applicable.

B. Bulk Materials:


2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials; discharge of soil-bearing water runoff; and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.

3. Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with appropriate certificates.

PLANTS 329300 - 5



C. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling.

D. Handle planting stock by root ball.

E. Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks (before wrapping), branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging, handling, and transportation.

1. If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at nursery before moving and again two weeks after planting.

F. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.

1. Heel-in bare-root stock. Soak roots that are in less than moist condition in water for two hours. Reject plants with dry roots.

2. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other acceptable material.

3. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.4. Water root systems of plants stored on-site deeply and thoroughly with a fine-mist spray.

Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but not overly wet condition.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with new plantings by field measurements before proceeding with planting work.

B. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

PLANTS 329300 - 6



1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period.


a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner.

b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over.c. Faulty performance of tree stabilization edgings.d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of planting completion.

a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months.b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 12 months.c. Annuals: Three months.

3. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum:

a. Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season.

b. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty period.

c. A limit of one replacement of each plant is required except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with requirements.

d. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for replaced plant material.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLANT MATERIAL

A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant List, Plant Schedule, or Plant Legend indicated on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.

1. Trees with damaged, crooked, or multiple leaders; tight vertical branches where bark is squeezed between two branches or between branch and trunk ("included bark"); crossing trunks; cut-off limbs more than 3/4 inch in diameter; or with stem girdling roots are unacceptable.

2. Collected Stock: Do not use plants harvested from the wild, from native stands, from an established landscape planting, or not grown in a nursery unless otherwise indicated.

PLANTS 329300 - 7



B. Provide plants of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI Z60.1 for types and form of plants required. Plants of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls.

C. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which begins at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting.

D. Labeling: Label at least one plant of each variety, size, and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of common name and full scientific name, including genus and species. Include nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or cultivar, if applicable for the plant.

E. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of plants is indicated on Drawings, select stock for uniform height and spread, and number the labels to assure symmetry in planting.

2.2 FERTILIZERS

A. Planting Tablets: Tightly compressed chip-type, long-lasting, slow-release, commercial-grade planting fertilizer in tablet form. Tablets shall break down with soil bacteria, converting nutrients into a form that can be absorbed by plant roots.

1. Size: 21-gram tablets.2. Nutrient Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5 percent

potassium, by weight plus micronutrients.

2.3 MULCHES

A. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following:

1. Type: Wood and bark chips. 2. Size Range: 3 inches maximum, 1/2 inch minimum. 3. Color: Natural.

B. Compost Mulch: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through a 1-inch sieve; soluble-salt content of 2 to 5 dS/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:

1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight.2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or

source-separated or compostable mixed solid waste.

PLANTS 329300 - 8



2.4 WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS

A. Nonwoven Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd. minimum, composed of fibers formed into a stable network so that fibers retain their relative position. Fabric shall be inert to biological degradation and resist naturally encountered chemicals, alkalis, and acids.

2.5 PESTICIDES

A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by the EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer.

C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated.

2.6 TREE-STABILIZATION MATERIALS

A. Trunk-Stabilization Materials:

1. Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound, new softwood with specified wood pressure-preservative treatment, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2-by-2-inch nominal by length indicated, pointed at one end.

2. Guys and Tie Wires: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1, galvanized-steel wire, two-strand, twisted, 0.106 inch in diameter.

B. Root-Ball Stabilization Materials:

1. Upright Stakes and Horizontal Hold-Down: Rough-sawn, sound, new hardwood or softwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2-by-2-inch nominal by length indicated; stakes pointed at one end.

2. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS

A. Planter Drainage Gravel: Washed, sound crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D448 for Size No. 8.

B. Planter Filter Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile manufactured for separation applications and made of polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fibers or combination of them.

PLANTS 329300 - 9



C. Mycorrhizal Fungi: Dry, granular inoculant containing at least 5300 spores per lb of vesicular-arbuscular mycorrhizal fungi and 95 million spores per lb of ectomycorrhizal fungi, 33 percent hydrogel, and a maximum of 5.5 percent inert material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive plants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance of the Work.

1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area.

2. Verify that plants and vehicles loaded with plants can travel to planting locations with adequate overhead clearance.

3. Suspend planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.

4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or which is dusty.

B. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and existing plants from damage caused by planting operations.

B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

C. Lay out plants at locations directed by Architect. Stake locations of individual trees and shrubs and outline areas for multiple plantings.

3.3 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT

A. General: Prepare planting area for soil placement and mix planting soil according to Section 329113 "Soil Preparation."

PLANTS 329300 - 10



B. Placing Planting Soil: Place manufactured planting soil over exposed subgrade. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

C. Application of Mycorrhizal Fungi: At time directed by Architect, broadcast dry product uniformly over prepared soil at application rate according to manufacturer's written recommendations

3.4 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS

A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits.

1. Excavate planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are unacceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.

2. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and burlapped container-grown stock.

3. Excavate at least 12 inches wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate vertical roots for bare-root stock.

4. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the bottom of the root ball.

5. If area under the plant was initially dug too deep, add soil to raise it to the correct level and thoroughly tamp the added soil to prevent settling.

6. Maintain angles of repose of adjacent materials to ensure stability. Do not excavate subgrades of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or existing improvements.

7. Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours.8. Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected when unattended by Installer's

personnel.

B. Backfill Soil: Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as backfill soil unless otherwise indicated.

C. Obstructions: Notify Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations.

D. Drainage: Notify Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub planting pits.

E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs.

PLANTS 329300 - 11



3.5 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PLANTING

A. Inspection: At time of planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1. If root flare is not visible, remove soil in a level manner from the root ball to where the top-most root emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the root flare, verify that root ball still meets size requirements.

B. Roots: Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break.

C. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Set each plant plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inch above adjacent finish grades.

1. Backfill: Planting soil. For trees, use excavated soil for backfill.2. After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and remove

burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.

3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.

4. Place planting tablets equally distributed around each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole.

a. Quantity: Three per plant.

5. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.

D. Container-Grown Stock: Set each plant plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inch above adjacent finish grades.

1. Backfill: Planting soil. For trees, use excavated soil for backfill.2. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant.3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air

pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.

4. Place planting tablets equally distributed around each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole.

5. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.

E. Slopes: When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball.

PLANTS 329300 - 12



3.6 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PRUNING

A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape.

B. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines as directed by Architect.

C. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural character.

D. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds.

3.7 TREE STABILIZATION

A. Trunk Stabilization by Upright Staking and Tying: Install trunk stabilization as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Upright Staking and Tying:

a. Stake trees of 2- through 5-inch caliper. Stake trees of less than 2-inch caliper only as required to prevent wind tip out. Use a minimum of two stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend to the dimension indicated on Drawings above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses.

2. Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.

3.8 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING

A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines as indicated on Drawings in even rows with triangular spacing.

B. Use planting soil for backfill.

C. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots.

D. For rooted cutting plants supplied in flats, plant each in a manner that minimally disturbs the root system but to a depth not less than two nodes.

E. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water.

F. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.

PLANTS 329300 - 13



G. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock.

3.9 PLANTING AREA MULCHING

A. Install weed-control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions. Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of 12 inches and secure seams with galvanized pins.

B. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated.

1. Organic Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 3-inch average thickness of organic mulch extending 12 inches beyond edge of individual planting pit or trench and over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch within 6 inches of trunks or stems.

3.10 PLANT MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, adjusting and repairing tree-stabilization devices, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings.

B. Fill in, as necessary, soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.

C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices when possible to minimize use of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control agents.

3.11 PESTICIDE APPLICATION

A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents according to authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Nonselective): Apply to tree, shrub, and ground-cover areas according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not apply to seeded areas.

C. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Nonselective): Apply only as necessary to treat already-germinated weeds and according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

PLANTS 329300 - 14



3.12 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT

A. General: Repair or replace existing or new trees and other plants that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.

1. Submit details of proposed pruning and repairs.2. Perform repairs of damaged trunks, branches, and roots within 24 hours, if approved.3. Replace trees and other plants that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status,

as determined by Architect.

B. Remove and replace trees that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition before the end of the corrections period or are damaged during construction operations that Architect determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern.

1. Provide new trees of same size as those being replaced for each tree of 4 inches or smaller in caliper size.

2. Species of Replacement Trees: Same species being replaced.


A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.

B. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

C. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings.

D. After installation and before Substantial Completion, remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie tape, labels, wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site.

E. At time of Substantial Completion, verify that tree-watering devices are in good working order and leave them in place. Replace improperly functioning devices.


A. Maintenance Service for Trees and Shrubs: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in "Plant Maintenance" Article. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established, but for not less than maintenance period below:

1. Maintenance Period: 12 months from date of planting completion.

PLANTS 329300 - 15



B. Maintenance Service for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in "Plant Maintenance" Article. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established, but for not less than maintenance period below:

1. Maintenance Period: Three months from date of planting completion.


POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE 33 05 07

729

SECTION 33 05 07

POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1. SECTION INCLUDES A. Polyvinyl chloride pipe, couplings, fittings and joint materials. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM Standards: D1784 Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and

Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. D2241 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure Rated Pipe (SDR -

Series). D2321 Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer

Pipe. D2412 Determination of External Loading Characteristics of

Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading. D2564 Solvent Cement for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic

Pipe and Fittings. D2729 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. D2774 Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure Piping. D2855 Making Solvent Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl

Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. D3034 Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and

Fittings. D3139 Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric

Seals. D3212 Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible

Elastomeric Seals. F656 Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of Poly(Vinyl

Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. F679 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic

Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings. F949 Poly(vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Corrugated sewer Pipe with a

Smooth Interior and Fittings. B. AWWA Standards: C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fitting, 3 inches Through 48

inches, for Water and Other Liquids. C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 In. Through 12

In., for Water Distribution.

33 05 07 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE

730

C905 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 14 In. Through 48 In.

C909 Molecularly Oriented Polyvinyl Chloride (PVCO) Pressure Pipe, 4 in. Through 24 In., for Water, Wastewater, and Reclaimed Water Service.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR): Outside diameter of pipe divided

by wall thickness. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Evaluate pipes that show damage such as dents, cuts, cracks, breaks,

fractures, or distortions. Recommend appropriate action. ENGINEER may require CONTRACTOR provide certification by a professional engineer competent in the structural design of the pipe material for action recommended.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRESSURE PIPE SYSTEM A. Pipe: AWWA C900, C905, or C909 as applicable. Use outside

diameters defined by ductile iron pipe sizes. Dimensions, class, SDR, and tolerances per ASTM D2241.

B. Compounds: Type 1, Grade 1, Class 12454A, ASTM D1784. C. Joints: 1. Bell and spigot with flexible elastomeric seals, ASTM D3139. Use

non-toxic lubricant. 2. Solvent weld, ASTM D2564. D. Fittings (4 inch and larger): Ductile iron Class 250, ASTM C110. 2.2 GRAVITY PIPE SYSTEM A. Pipe: 1. Solid smooth wall: a. 4 to 15 inch diameter, ASTM D3034. b. 18 to 27 inch diameter, ASTM F679. 2. Corrugated wall with a smooth interior, 4 to 10 inches diameter,

ASTM F949. B. Fittings: ASTM D1784. C. Stiffness: 50 psi minimum when measured at five (5) percent deflection,

ASTM D2412. D. Additives and Fillers: Not to exceed 10 parts by weight; 100 parts of

resin in the compound. E. Joints: Bell and spigot with flexible elastomeric seals, ASTM D3212. F. Flattening: No visual evidence of splitting, cracking, or breaking when

POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE 33 05 07

731

flattened to 60 percent deflection, ASTM D2412. 2.3 PERFORATED PIPE SYSTEM A. Pipe: Refer to gravity pipe products above. B. Perforations: ASTM D2729. C. Joints: Push-on, solvent weld or other. 2.4 SOLVENT WELDS A. Primer, ASTM F656. B. Glue, ASTM D2564.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION A. Assembly: Abide by manufacturer’s instructions and the following. Use

the more stringent provisions if there are any conflicts. 1. Pressurized Systems: a. Water distribution and transmission, Section 33 11 00, AWWA

C900, C905, and C909. b. Underground irrigation, Section 32 84 23, and ASTM D2855. 2. Gravity Systems: a. Sanitary sewers, Section 33 31 00. b. Under drains and storm drains, Section 33 41 00. B. Burial: Comply with Section 33 05 20 and the following. Use the more

stringent provisions if there are any conflicts. 1. ASTM D2774 for pressure pipe systems. 2. ASTM D2321 for gravity pipe systems.

END OF SECTION

33 05 07 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE

732

UTILITY GRADE ADJUSTMENT 33 05 14

751

SECTION 33 05 14

UTILITY GRADE ADJUSTMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Raise, lower, or change slope of Street Fixtures. B. Install Cover Collars. C. This specification is NOT APPLICABLE to raising and lowering Street

Fixtures that withstand internal pressure. 1.2 REFERENCES A. APWA (Utah) Standards. Plan 273 Frame and cover for monument Plan 360 Grade ring Plan 362 Cover collar for storm drains Plan 413 Cover collar for sanitary sewer manhole Plan 574 Cover collar for water valve box 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Box: A structure such as a valve box, meter box, monument box, fire

hydrant box, electrical pull box, cleanout box or other like structure not intended for human entry.

B. Cover Collar: A concrete filled annular space between the frame of a Street Fixture and the adjacent pavement surface usually one (1) foot wide.

C. Extension Ring: A concrete or metal ring used to adjust surface elevations and surface cross slopes of Street Fixtures covers. Metal rings are used between metal frames and metal covers or grates. Concrete rings are used below metal frames or in the concrete structure below.

D. Manhole: A structure designed to permit human entry and working space inside and to confine and control the flow of pipe-conveyed fluids. These structures are collectively referred to as manholes regardless of composition, design, type or depth.

E. Street Fixture: The top of existing structures such as but not limited to Manholes, catch basin, sumps, inlets, valve boxes, meter boxes, monument boxes, and similar structure in a thoroughfare surface.

F. Vault: A structure intended for human entry containing electrical or telephone facilities or other like utilities.

33 05 14 UTILITY GRADE ADJUSTMENT

752

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PAVEMENT A. Bituminous Concrete: Unless indicated otherwise in the Bid Documents

or by ENGINEER, provide PG64-22, DM-1/2, 50 blow, product per Section 32 12 05.

B. Concrete: Class 4000 cast-in-place, Section 03 30 04. 2.2 GROUT A. Portland cement grout, Section 03 61 00. 2.3 EXTENSION RINGS A. Metal: APWA 273. B. Concrete or plastic: APWA Plan 360..

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION A. Determine condition of existing incidental structure. Any item not

reported damaged before construction shall be considered unbroken and must be replaced by CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to OWNER.

B. Provide Invert Cover over pipe in cleanout box to prevent gravel, concrete, or debris from entering pipeline.

C. Unless required otherwise, arrange for utility companies to adjust their own structures.

D. Coordinate all adjustments with requirements of affected utility company.

3.2 ADJUST STRUCTURE TO GRADE A. Restrict excavation around structure to a minimum. B. After structure adjustment, backfill void around structure and compact

before paving or landscaping. C. Apply mortar to inside and outside of concrete grade rings. D. If the cone is cracked during construction, restack the manhole with

shorter manhole sections and install a new cone at no additional cost to the OWNER.

3.3 ADJUST COVER IN PAVEMENT SURFACE A. Method A - Metal extension rings: 1. Use rings that lock together. 2. Set frame at desired elevation and cross-slope. 3. Seal joints between pavement and ring, Section 32 01 17.

UTILITY GRADE ADJUSTMENT 33 05 14

753

B. Method B – Concrete extension rings: 1. Place concrete grade rings under frame or in structure riser shaft. 2. Set frame at desired elevation and cross-slope. 3. Provide 100 percent concrete support under frame. Do not use

wood, bricks, concrete fragments, blocks or particles as support. 4. Grout seams between concrete rings and between frame and

concrete rings. C. Method C – Place Concrete: 1. Set frame at desired elevation and cross-slope. 2. Place concrete and provide 100 percent concrete support under

frame. D. Method D – Concrete Deck: 1. Remove existing concrete deck. 2. Reset steel rebar. 3. Set frame to grade, set forms. 4. Pour concrete. Provide complete concrete support under Street

Fixtures. 3.4 INSTALL COVER COLLAR A. Follow APWA Plans 362, 413, or 574 requirements as applicable.. B. Open annular space between pavement and Street Fixtures cover. Unless

indicated otherwise, make space 12 inches wide. C. Set concrete collar to 1/4 inch minimum to 1/2 inch maximum below

bituminous concrete pavement surface and 1/4 inch below Portland cement concrete pavement surface.

D. Trowel finish, Section 03 35 00. 3.5 SURFACE FINISHING A. In new streets or overlays, adjust Street Fixture covers after paving is

complete. B. Restore paved surfaces, Section 33 05 25. C. Landscapes: Restore landscaping as indicated and as follows where

applicable. 1. Section 32 92 00 for turf and grasses. 2. Section 32 93 13 for other ground cover. D. Repair public and private facilities damaged by CONTRACTOR.

END OF SECTION

33 05 14 UTILITY GRADE ADJUSTMENT

754

BACKFILLING TRENCHES 33 05 20

755

SECTION 33 05 20

BACKFILLING TRENCHES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Backfill materials in trenches and backfilling requirements. 1.2 REFERENCES A. APWA (Utah) Standards: Plan 381 Trench backfill Plan 382 Pipe zone backfill B. ASTM Standards: D698 Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using

Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). D1557 Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil using

Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)). D2922 Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear

Methods (Shallow Depth). D4832 Preparation and Testing of Soil-Cement Slurry Test

Cylinders. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Bedding: That surface of the excavation or portion of the Pipe Zone

below the pipe. B. Pipe Zone: That zone in a backfilling operation which supports, and

surrounds the pipe barrel, and extends to 1 foot above the top of the pipe barrel.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit maximum laboratory dry density and optimum laboratory

moisture content for: 1. Subgrade material, and 2. Each type of fill to be used. B. Submit aggregate batch delivery tickets showing name of material

source, serial number of ticket, date and truck number, name of Supplier, job name and location, volume or weight. And aggregate classification or Supplier’s identification code.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Do not change material sources, or aggregate without ENGINEER's

knowledge. B. Reject backfill material that does not comply with requirements in this

Section.

33 05 20 BACKFILLING TRENCHES

756

C. If requested, submit a quality control inspections and testing report describing source and field quality control activities performed by CONTRACTOR and Suppliers.

1.6 STORAGE A. Safely stockpile backfill materials. B. Separate differing materials, prevent mixing, and maintain optimum

moisture content of backfill materials. 1.7 SITE CONDITIONS A. Do not place, spread, or roll any backfill material over material that is

damaged by water. Remove and replace damaged material at no additional cost to OWNER.

B. Control traffic and erosion. Keep area free of trash and debris. Repair settled, eroded, and rutted areas.

C. Reshape and compact damaged structural section to required density. D. Restore any damaged structure to its original strength and condition. E. Replace contaminated backfill at no additional cost to OWNER. 1.8 SEQUENCING A. Coordinate backfilling operation with pipeline commissioning, Section

33 08 00. 1.9 ACCEPTANCE A. General: Native material may be wasted if there is no additional cost to

substitute material acceptable to ENGINEER. B. Material: For material acceptance refer to: 1. Common fill, Section 31 05 13. 2. Aggregate base course, Section 32 11 23. 3. Cement treated fill, Section 31 05 15. C. Lift Thickness: One test per lot. D. Compaction: One test per lot. Verify density using nuclear tests, ASTM

D2922. Compaction standard and Lot sizes as follows:

Table 1: Compaction Standard and Lot Size Material Proctor Lot Size

Subgrade Standard 200 linear feet

Common Fill Standard 200 linear feet per lift 25 square feet of footing area per lift

Aggregate base course Modified 200 linear feet per lift

25 square feet of footing area per lift NOTES (a) Standard proctor, ASTM D698. (b) Modified proctor, ASTM D1557. (c) Lift thickness above pipe zone before compaction, 8 inches.

E. Flowable Fill Strength: Lot size is one (1) day production with sub-lots


757

of 50 cubic yards or part thereof. Verify strength using cylinders, ASTM D4832.

F. Grade, Cross Slope: Measured at random locations. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Correct any settlement of Trench backfill or structures built over Trench

backfill at no cost to OWNER. B. Restore structures damaged by settlement at no additional cost to

OWNER.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 BACKFILL MATERIALS A. Common fill, Section 31 05 13. Granular material, CONTRACTOR’s

choice. B. Aggregate base course, Section 32 11 23. Untreated base course. C. Cement treated fill, Section 31 05 15. Use a flowable fill so vibration is

not required. D. Slag or bitumen bearing material NOT ALLOWED in trench. 2.2 WATER A. Make arrangements for sources of water during construction and make

arrangements for delivery of water to site. B. Comply with local Laws and Regulations at no additional cost to

OWNER when securing water from water utility company. 2.3 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC A. Section 31 05 19. Use woven or non-woven stabilization-separation

fabric. Select either moderate MARV or high MARV as needed. 2.4 IDENTIFICATION TAPE A. Permanent, bright colored, continuous printed magnetic plastic tape,

intended for direct burial service; not less than six (6) inches wide by four (4) mils thick. Tape shall read "CAUTION: BURIED INSTALLATION BELOW". Color as follows.

Red Electric power lines, cables, conduit and lighting cables Yellow Gas, oil, steam, petroleum or gaseous materials Orange Communications, alarm, signal, cables or conduits

Blue Potable water Purple Reclaimed water, irrigation and slurry lines Green Sewer and storm drain lines

PART 3 EXECUTION


758

3.1 PREPARATION A. Implement traffic control plan requirements, Section 01 55 26. B. Identify required line, levels, contours, and datum. C. Stake and flag locations of underground utilities. D. Verify: 1. Backfill material meets gradation requirements. 2. Foundation walls are braced to support surcharge forces imposed by

backfilling operations, areas to be backfilled are free of debris, snow, ice or water.

3. Trench bottom is not frozen. E. If ground water is in the intended backfill zone, dewater. 3.2 SUBGRADE A. Protect subgrade from desiccation, flooding, and freezing. B. Before backfilling over Subgrade, get ENGINEER’s review of Subgrade

surface preparations. C. If Subgrade is not readily compactable, get ENGINEER’s permission to

stabilize the subgrade: 1. Excavation for Subgrade stabilization is incidental work, Section 31

23 16. 2. Place geotextile fabric. Place acceptable fill in lifts. Compact. 3.3 PROTECTION A. During installation or repair, plug end of pipe or fitting except when

installing next section of pipe or fitting. B. Movement of construction machinery over Work at any stage of

construction is solely at CONTRACTOR’s risk. 3.4 GENERAL BACKFILLING REQUIREMENTS A. Avoid injuring and displacement of conduit, pipe and structures while

compacting soil or operating equipment next to pipeline. B. Place geotextile fabrics; Section 31 05 19. C. Do not damage corrosion protection on pipe. D. Repair or replace damaged pipe at no additional cost to OWNER. E. Withdraw sheathing, shoring, piles, and similar supports as backfilling

progresses. Backfill and compact all holes left by removals. F. Provide sufficient water quality facilities to protect downstream fish and

wildlife, and to meet State water quality requirements. G. Water settling of trench backfill is not permitted. "Jetting" of trench

backfill is prohibited. 3.5 PIPE ZONE A. Follow APWA Plan 382 requirements. B Maintain uniform foundation along barrel of pipe with sufficient relief

for joint connections.


759

C. Use backfill materials meeting pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Maximum backfill particle size is 3/4 inch for plastic pipe.

D. Do not permit free fall of backfill material that may damage pipe, pipe finish, or pipe alignment.

E. Except where piping must remain exposed for tests, fill pipe zone as soon as possible.

3.6 TRENCH ABOVE PIPE ZONE. A. Follow APWA Plan 381 requirements. B. Maximum lift thickness before compaction is eight (8) inches. C. Fill unauthorized excavations with material acceptable to ENGINEER at

no additional cost to OWNER. D. Do not damage adjacent structures or service lines. E. Install continuous identification tape directly over buried lines 18 inches

below finished grade. 3.7 MODIFIED BACKFILL LAYER METHOD A. At discretion of CONTRACTOR, backfill may be placed in thicker

layers than indicated above subject to the following provisions: 1. CONTRACTOR proves the ability of proposed method to achieve

specified average compaction density. 2. ENGINEER, on the basis of test results, approves the system in

writing. B. Should CONTRACTOR find it necessary to change the method or any

part of it, including the source of material, or the rate of placing the material, obtain approval of ENGINEER, who may require a further trial area.

C. If testing shows a previously approved system is no longer producing the required degree of compaction, make changes to comply.

D. Where vibration effects are creating environmental problems, make changes to eliminate problems.

3.8 TOLERANCES A. Compaction: Ninety-five (95) percent or greater relative to a standard or

modified proctor density, Section 31 23 26. B. Lift Thickness (before compaction): 1. Eight (8) inches when using riding compaction equipment. 2. Six (6) inches when using hand held compaction equipment. 3. As proven in the modified backfill layer method. C. Cement Treated Fill: Compressive strength targets are 60 psi in 28 days

and 90 psi maximum in 28 days. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test trench backfilling until a compaction pattern acceptable to

CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER is achieved. Continue random quality control compaction testing.


760

3.10 SURFACE FINISHING A. Provide temporary paved surfaces where trenches pass through

roadways, driveway approaches or sidewalks. B. Restore paved surfaces, Section 33 05 25. C. Landscapes: Restore landscaping as indicated and as follows where

applicable. 1. Section 32 92 00 for turf and grasses. 2. Section 32 93 13 for other ground cover. D. Repair public and private facilities damaged by CONTRACTOR.

3.11 CLEANING A. Remove stockpiles from site when work is complete. Grade site to

prevent free standing surface water. B. Leave borrow areas clean and neat.

END OF SECTION

STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 33 41 00

815

SECTION 33 41 00

DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Installation of a buried non-pressure pipe system such as a storm drain, a

sub-drain, irrigation, etc. B. Refer to Section 33 11 00 if the installation is a pressurized pipe system. 1.2 REFERENCES A APWA (Utah) Standards: Plan 255 Bituminous concrete T-patch Plan 256 Concrete pavement patch Plan 315 Catch basin (single or double grate) Plan 317 Curb face inlet box Plan 322 Curb face outlet box Plan 323 Pipe outfall Plan 331 Cleanout box Plan 341 Precast manhole Plan 381 Trench backfill Plan 382 Pipe zone backfill B. ASTM Standards: C 478 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Section. C 923 Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete

Manhole Structures, Pipes and Laterals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Non-pressure Pipe System: Pipelines with joints that have no leakage

after a sustained hydraulic pressure not exceeding 10.8 psi (22 in. Hg) for 10 minutes or a sustained vacuum pressure not exceeding 3 kPa (5 in. Hg) for 10-minutes.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Vertical Cover: Unless indicated otherwise, provide at least two (2) feet

of protection cover during construction. B. Remove any section of pipe already placed that is found to be out of

alignment tolerance, defective, or damaged. Relay or replace without additional cost to OWNER.

33 41 00 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

816

1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and

installation instructions. B. Commissioning: Provide Section 33 08 00 submittals. 1.6 SITE CONDITIONS A. Minimize neighborhood traffic interruptions. Barricade stockpiles. B. Provide access to adjacent properties for local traffic and pedestrians,

Section 01 31 13. 1.7 ACCEPTANCE A. Each drainage system component must pass applicable commissioning

requirements in Section 33 08 00.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES AND FITTINGS A. Provide piping materials and factory fabricated piping products of sizes,

types, and classes required. B. Where not indicated, select product acceptable to ENGINEER and

comply with installation requirements. C. Provide pipe fittings and accessories of same material and weight or

class as pipe, with joining method indicated or recommended by manufacturer.

2.2 IN-PLANE WALL DRAINAGE A. Drainage Core: Manufacturer's standard three-dimensional non-bio-

degradable, plastic designed to effectively conduct water to foundation drainage system.

B. Filter Fabric: Manufacturer's standard non-woven geotextile fabric of polypropylene or polyester fibers, or combination.

2.3 SUB DRAIN FILL MATERIALS A. Sewer rock, Section 32 11 23 and geotextile, Section 31 05 19. 2.4 MORTAR, GROUT AND CONCRETE A. Portland cement mortar, Section 04 05 16. B. Non-shrink grout, Section 03 61 00. C. Concrete: 1. Cast-in-place: Section 03 30 04. 2. Precast Concrete: Section 03 40 00. 2.5 MANHOLES A. Basin: Concrete floor with cast in place concrete walls or ASTM C478

precast concrete. B. Steps: None.


817

C. Top: Concentric cone. Concentric flat slab concrete deck allowed only with ENGINEER's permission.

D. Frame and Cover: Scoriated, asphalt coated, heavy duty, ductile iron Section 05 56 00, with flat top design meeting load rating H-20 and appropriate utility lettering. Shape, size and lifting device as necessary.

E. Pipe Connectors: 1. Precast Bases: Resilient, ASTM C923. Sand mortar grout pipe

connections. 2. Cast in Place or Connections to Existing Fixture with Plastic Pipe:

Use rubber adapter gasket for precast sections. Grout, Section 03 61 00 for cast in place sections.

F. Joints in Sections: Bituminous mastic gasket-type sealant or otherwise acceptable to ENGINEER.

2.6 INLETS, CATCH BASINS, CLEANOUTS A. Basin: Concrete floor and walls. B. Pipe Connectors: Resilient, ASTM C923. Sand mortar grout. C. Frame and Grate: 1. Asphalt coated, heavy duty, cast iron, Section 05 56 00. Shape and

size indicated. 2. Galvanized, heavy duty, steel: Sections 05 12 00 and 05 05 10.

Shape and size as indicated. 2.7 OUTFALLS A. Cast-in-place or precast concrete with reinforced headwall, apron, and

tapered sides. Provide riprap, Section 31 37 00, if indicated. 2.8 DRAIN PIPE JOINT SCREENS A. Heavy mesh burlap, coal-tar saturated felt, 18 to 14 mesh copper

screening or synthetic drainage fabric. B. Plastic or corrosion resistant metal bands.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION A. Verify Trench Excavation is ready to receive work, and dimensions, and

elevations are correct. Commencing installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Backfill over excavations and compact, Section 31 23 26.

C. Remove stones larger than two (2) inches or other hard matter that could damage pipe or impede backfilling or compaction.

D. Examine areas and conditions under which materials and products are to be installed. Do not proceed with system installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to system installer.


818

E. Clearly identify and promptly set aside defective or damaged pipe. F. Use pipe cutting tool acceptable to pipe manufacturer. 3.2 ABANDONED UTILITIES A. Use concrete to plug and cap open ends of abandoned underground

utilities that are to remain in place. B. Provide closures to withstand hydrostatic or earth pressure that may

result after ends of abandoned utilities have been closed. 3.3 INSTALLATION - PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Place bell or groove end facing upstream. B. Install gaskets per manufacturer's recommendations. C. Plug pipeline branches, stubs or other open ends that are not to be

immediately connected. D. Clean interior of pipe of dirt and debris as work progresses. E. Insulate dissimilar metals from direct contact with each other using

neoprene gaskets or asphalt coatings. F. Meet line and grade tolerance in Section 33 08 00. Use a laser device or

demonstrate an equivalent method of establishing line and grade 3.4 INSTALLATION - JOINTS A. Join pipe per manufacturer's recommendation. B. Join pipe of different sizes at manholes or cleanouts only. C. Use neoprene couplings with stainless steel bands to make connections

between dissimilar pipe, or where standard pipeline joints are impractical.

3.5 INSTALLATION - MANHOLES A. Install manholes per APWA Plan 341. B. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation. C. Place structures in location indicated. D. Provide elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets indicated. E. When structures occur in Pavements, mount frame and cover 1/2 inch

below finished surface. Provide a concrete Cover Collar between the frame and bituminous concrete pavement. Elsewhere set frame and cover three (3) inches above finished grade.

3.6 INSTALLATION - INLETS, CATCH BASINS, CLEANOUTS A. Install facilities per APWA Plans 315, 316, 317, 331. B. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation. C. Construct with all connecting piping and appurtenances in their final

position. D. Cut all piping parallel to interior surface wall. Grout connection to

provide smooth transition inlet into pipe.


819

3.7 INSTALLATION SUB DRAIN SYSTEMS A. Install pipe and fittings per manufacturer's requirements. B. Open Joint Systems: Loosely butt pipe ends. Place 12 inches wide filter

fabric around pipe circumference, centered over joint. C. Mechanical Joint Perforated Pipe System: Place pipe with perforations

facing down. D. Place drainage pipe on bed of sewer rock, Section 31 05 13. 3.8 INSTALLATION - TAP CONNECTIONS A. Not allowed in storm drain systems. Provide a cleanout or manhole

structure. 3.9 INSTALLATION - OUTFALLS A. Install outfalls per APWA Plans 322 and 323.

3.10 INSTALLATION - AREA DRAINS A. Install area drains per APWA Plan 372.

3.11 BACKFILLING A. Trench Backfill: Place backfill per Section 33 05 20. Provide product

and placement indicated in the following Standard Plans. 1. APWA Plan 382 for pipe zone backfill. 2. APWA Plan 381 for trench backfill above pipe zone. B. Landscapes: Restore landscaping as indicated and as follows where

applicable. 1. Section 32 92 00 for turf and grass cover. 2. Section 32 93 13 for other ground cover. C. Repair public and private facilities damaged by CONTRACTOR.

3.12 SURFACE FINISHING A. Roadway Trenches and Patches: Restore pavement patches per Section

33 05 25. Provide product and placement indicated in the following standard plans.

1. APWA Plan 255 for bituminous pavement T-patch. 2. APWA Plan 256 for concrete pavement patch. B. Landscapes: Restore landscaping as indicated and as follows where

applicable. 1. Section 32 92 00 for turf and grass cover. 2. Section 32 93 13 for other ground cover. C. Repair public and private facilities damaged by CONTRACTOR.


820

3.13 COMMISSIONING A. Before surface finishing, commission pipeline per Section 33 08 00.

Provide sizes and types of equipment connections and fittings that match pipe materials when pressure testing system.

B. If paved surfaces must be kept open prior to commissioning, provide temporary paved surfaces.

3.14 CLEANING A. Remove debris, concrete, or other extraneous material that accumulates

in existing piping or structures. B. Clean all pipelines after testing. Do not flush sand, gravel, concrete,

debris or other materials into existing piping systems.

END OF SECTION